RobH_en_tn/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv

1	Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
2	1CO	front	intro	e8ey			0		# Introduction to 1 Corinthians<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Book of 1 Corinthians<br><br>1. Opening (1:1–9)<br>2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)<br>3. Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20)<br>4. On abstinence (7:1–40)<br>5. On food (8:1–11:1)<br>6. On head coverings (11:2–16)<br>7. On the Lord’s Supper (11:17-34)<br>8. On spiritual gifts (12:1–14:40)<br>9. On the resurrection of the dead (15:1–58)<br>10. On the collection and visits (16:1–12)<br>11. Closing: final commands and greetings (16:13–24)<br><br>### Who wrote the Book of 1 Corinthians?<br><br>Paul wrote 1 Corinthians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.<br><br>Paul started the church that met in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.<br><br>### What is the Book of 1 Corinthians about?<br><br>1 Corinthians is a letter that Paul wrote to the believers who were in the city of Corinth. Paul had heard that there were problems among the believers there. They were arguing with each other. Some of them did not understand some of the Christian teachings. And some of them were behaving badly. In this letter, Paul responded to them and encouraged them to live in a way that pleased God.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “First Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What was the city of Corinth like?<br><br>Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.<br><br>### What was the problem with meat sacrificed to idols?<br><br>Many animals were slaughtered and sacrificed to the false gods in Corinth. Priests and worshipers kept some of the meat. Much of the meat was sold in markets. Many Christians disagreed with each other over whether it was right for them to eat this meat, because it had been dedicated to a false god. Paul writes about this problem in 1 Corinthians.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### What do “knowledge” and “wisdom” mean in 1 Corinthians?<br><br>### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 1 Corinthians in the ULT?<br><br>The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, 1 Corinthians ULT uses the following principles:<br><br>* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.” (See: 1:2; 3:17)<br>* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 6:1, 2; 14:33; 16:1, 15)<br>* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.” (See: 1:2; 6:11; 7:14, 34)<br><br>The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.<br><br>### What is the meaning of “flesh?”<br><br>Paul frequently used the terms “flesh” or “fleshly” to refer to Christians who did sinful things. However, it is not the physical world that is evil. Paul also described Christians who lived in a righteous way as “spiritual.” This is because they did what the Holy Spirit taught them to do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])<br><br>### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?<br><br>This kind of expression occurs in 1:2, 30, 31; 3:1; 4:10, 15, 17; 6:11, 19; 7:22; 9:1, 2; 11:11, 25; 12:3, 9, 13, 18, 25; 14:16; 15:18, 19, 22, 31, 58; 16:19, 24. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “those who have been dedicated in Christ Jesus” (1:2), where Paul specifically meant that Christian believers have been dedicated to Christ.<br><br>Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Corinthians?<br><br>For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. Translators are advised to follow the modern versions of the Bible. However, if in the translators’ region there are Bibles that read according to older versions of the Bible, the translators can follow those. If so, these verses should be put inside square brackets (\[\]) to indicate that they were probably not original to 1 Corinthians.<br><br>* “Therefore glorify God with your body.” Some older versions read “Therefore glorify God with your body and in your spirit, which are God’s.” (6:20)<br>* “I did this even though I myself was not under the law” (9:20). Some older versions leave this passage out.<br>* “for the sake of conscience--the conscience of the other man.” Some older versions read “for the sake of conscience: for the earth and everything in it belong to the Lord: the conscience of the other man.” (10:28)<br>* “and that I give my body to be burned” (13:3). Some older versions read, “and that I give my body so that I might boast.”<br>* “But if anyone does not recognize this, let him not be recognized” (14:38). Some older versions read, “But if anyone is ignorant of this, let him be ignorant.”<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3	1CO	1	intro	ud5y			0		# 1 Corinthians 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Opening (1:1–9)<br> * Greetings and Blessing (1:1–3)<br> * Praise and Prayer (1:4–9)<br>2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)<br> * Divisions, Leaders, and Baptism (1:10–17)<br> * Wisdom, Foolishness, and Boasting (1:18–31)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 19, which are from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Disunity<br><br>In this chapter, Paul urges the Corinthians to stop dividing up into smaller groups that identify themselves with one specific leader. He mentions some of the leaders, including himself, in [1:12](../01/12.md). The Corinthians probably chose these leaders themselves, since there is no evidence that any of the people mentioned in [1:12](../01/12.md) were trying to create their own groups. People in the Corinthian church were probably trying to sound wiser or more powerful than other people, so they would choose a group and a leader and say they were better than others. Paul argues against these kinds of divisions first, and then he argues against anyone who tries to sound wiser and more powerful than others. <br><br>### Wisdom and foolishness<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks of both wisdom and foolishness. These words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. If someone creates plans and ideas that work out well, that person is wise. If someone creates plans and ideas that do not work out well, that person is foolish. The wise person makes good choices, and the foolish person makes bad choices. Use words in your language that indicate these ideas. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fool]])<br><br>### Power and weakness<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks of both power and weakness. These words primarily refer to how much influence and authority a person has and to how much they can accomplish. Someone who has “power” has much influence and authority and can accomplish many things. Someone who has “weakness” does not have much influence and authority and is not able to accomplish many things. Use words in your language that indicate these ideas (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/power]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphors about Christ <br><br>In this chapter, Paul says that “Christ is the power of God and the wisdom of God” ([1:24](../01/24.md)) and that Christ “was made for us wisdom from God, righteousness, and also sanctification and redemption” ([1:30](../01/30.md)). With these two verses, Paul is not saying that Christ is no longer a person and is instead these abstract ideas. Rather, Paul is speaking in this way because Christ and his work for believers include all of these abstract ideas. Christ’s work is powerful and wise, and gives those who believe in him wisdom, righteousness, sanctification, and redemption. For ways to translate these two statements, see the notes on these two verses. <br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul asks many questions in this chapter. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Positive and negative uses of “wisdom”<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks about wisdom in both positive and negative ways. He uses the same words throughout the chapter, and he distinguishes between positive and negative meanings by connecting the words to different people or ideas. For example, he speaks of wisdom negatively when it is the wisdom of the world, or the wisdom of humans. However, he speaks of wisdom positively when it is wisdom from God or wisdom given by God. If possible, translate the negative and positive meanings of wisdom with the same word, just as Paul uses one word for both negative and positive. If you must use different words, use positive words for God’s wisdom and negative words for human wisdom. <br><br>### Using different perspectives<br><br>Sometimes, Paul speaks of God as if God were “foolish” and “weak” ([1:25](../01/25.md)) and as if he chose “foolish” and “weak” things ([1:27](../01/27.md)). Paul does not actually think that God is foolish and weak and chooses foolish and weak things. Rather, he is speaking from the perspective of normal human thinking. What God does, from a human perspective, is “weak” and “foolish.” He makes this clear in several verses. For example, in [1:26](../01/26.md), Paul says that most of the Corinthians were not wise “according to the flesh.” This is Paul’s way of saying that they were not wise according to human thinking. If possible translate the times Paul speaks from a human perspective with the same words he uses for “weakness” and “foolishness” when he speaks from God’s perspective. If it is necessary to distinguish these uses, use a word or phrase that explains which perspective Paul is using. He does this himself sometimes, and if it is necessary, you can do it in other places as well. <br><br>### Information presented out of order<br><br>The ULT puts parentheses around [1:16](../01/16.md) because Paul is speaking about whom he baptized, an idea that fits logically with [1:14](../01/14.md) and not as well after [1:15](../01/15.md). Paul has remembered someone else that he baptized, and instead of going back and putting that information in [1:14](../01/14.md), he includes it in [1:16](../01/16.md), interrupting the flow of the argument. If possible, keep [1:16](../01/16.md) where it is, and use a form in your language that indicates that Paul is interrupting his argument. If there is no way to do this in your language, you could move it between [1:14](../01/14.md) and [1:15](../01/15.md). <br>
4	1CO	1	1	m3dd	figs-exclusive		0	General Information	Throughout this letter the words “we,” “us,” “our,” and “ours” include the Corinthian believers unless otherwise noted. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive)
5	1CO	1	1	lihg	figs-yousingular<br>		0	General Information<br>	The words “you,” “your,” and “yours” refer to the Corinthians believers and so are plural unless otherwise noted. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular)<br>
6	1CO	1	1	o7ie	figs-123person	Παῦλος	1		In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, referring to themselves in the third person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can use the first person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “From Paul. I have been” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
7	1CO	1	1	e8j3	translate-names	Παῦλος	1	Paul	Here and throughout the letter, this is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
8	1CO	1	1	qp1n	figs-activepassive	κλητὸς ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	Sosthenes our brother	If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express **called by Christ Jesus {to be} an apostle** in active form. Alternate translation: “whom Christ Jesus called {to be} an apostle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9	1CO	1	1	qvn5	figs-possession	διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the will** that **God** has. If it would be misunderstood in your language that this phrase refers to what God wills, you could express the idea with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “because God desired this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
10	1CO	1	1	xfbo	figs-explicit	καὶ Σωσθένης	1		This phrase means that Sosthenes is with Paul, and Paul writes the letter for both of them. It does not mean that Sosthenes was the scribe who wrote the letter down. It also does not mean that Sosthenes dictated the letter with Paul, since Paul uses the first person singular more than the first person plural in the letter. If there is a way in your language to indicate that Paul writes in behalf of Sosthenes, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “and I write in behalf of Sosthenes” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
11	1CO	1	1	n9zv	translate-names	Σωσθένης	1		This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
12	1CO	1	2	r9kg	figs-123person	τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ…τῇ οὔσῃ ἐν Κορίνθῳ	1	to the church of God at Corinth	In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would name those to whom they sent the letter, referring to them in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you can use the second person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the recipient of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “This letter is for you who are members of the church of God at Corinth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
13	1CO	1	2	e75p	figs-activepassive	ἡγιασμένοις	1	those who have been sanctified in Christ Jesus	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express **having been sanctified** in active form with “God” as the subject. Alternate translation: “God having sanctified you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14	1CO	1	2	lp42	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains: (1) the means by which God has sanctified the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “by means of your union with Christ Jesus” (2) the reason why God has sanctified the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “because of your union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15	1CO	1	2	e8jw	figs-activepassive	κλητοῖς ἁγίοις	1	who are called to be saints	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express **called {to be} saints** in active form with “God” as the subject. Alternate translation: “whom God has called {to be} saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
16	1CO	1	2	nz5s	figs-hyperbole	ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ	1		Here, Paul describes all believers as if they were **in every place**. He speaks this way to emphasize that believers can be found in many countries, towns, and villages. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could indicate that believers are found in many places around the world. Alternate translation: “in many places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
17	1CO	1	2	l21m	figs-idiom	ἐπικαλουμένοις τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	those who call on the name of our Lord Jesus Christ	“Calling on the name of” someone is an idiom that refers to worshiping and praying to that person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “who pray to and venerate our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
18	1CO	1	2	l9rq	figs-ellipsis	αὐτῶν καὶ ἡμῶν	1	their Lord and ours	In the phrase, Paul has left out words that may be needed in some languages to make a complete thought. If you cannot leave out these words in your language, you could supply words such as “who is” and “Lord” to make a complete thought. Alternate translation: “who is Lord over them and us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
19	1CO	1	3	gc2c	translate-blessing<br>	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	General Information:	After stating his name and the name of the person to whom he is writing, Paul adds a blessing for the Corinthians. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness and peace within you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus the Messiah” or “I pray that grace and peace from God our Father and the Lord Jesus the Messiah will always be with you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing)
20	1CO	1	4	zd7l	figs-hyperbole	πάντοτε	1		Here, **always** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to express how often he prays for the Corinthians. If **always** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that indicates frequency. Alternate translation: “consistently” or “frequently” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole)
21	1CO	1	4	qoag	figs-distinguish	τῷ Θεῷ μου	1		When Paul speaks of **my God**, he does not mean that this is a different **God** than the one the Corinthians believe in. Rather, he simply wishes to state that this is **God** is his God. If **my God** in your translation sounds like it makes a distinction between Paul’s God and the Corinthians’ God, you could translate with a plural pronoun. Alternate translation: “to our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
22	1CO	1	4	t16d	figs-activepassive	τῇ δοθείσῃ<br>	1	because of the grace of God that was given to you in Christ Jesus	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express **that was given** in active form with “God” or “he” as the subject. Alternate translation: “that he gave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
23	1CO	1	4	jjtn	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains (1) the means by which God has given grace to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “by means of your union with Christ Jesus” (2) the reason why God has given grace to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “because of your union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
24	1CO	1	5	nl9z	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1		The word translated **For** introduces an explanation of “the grace of God that was given” in [1:4](../01/04.md). Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “That is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
25	1CO	1	5	qsc9		παντὶ	1		Alternate translation: “every way”
26	1CO	1	5	js7f	figs-metaphor	ἐπλουτίσθητε	1	you have been made rich in him	Here, Paul speaks as if the Corinthians had received a lot of money **in him**. With this language of being **rich**, Paul means that the Corinthians have received more than they need, and [1:7](../01/07.md) shows that what they have received are spiritual blessings and gifts. If being **made rich** would be misunderstood by your readers, you could: (1) express this idea with a phrase that refers to how much God has given them. Alternate translation: “you were given many gifts” (2) clarify that Paul speaks of spiritual riches. Alternate translation: “you were made spiritually rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
27	1CO	1	5	kaie	figs-activepassive	ἐπλουτίσθητε	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express **you were made rich** in active form, with “God” as the subject. Alternate translation: “God has made you rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28	1CO	1	5	n9wn	writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐτῷ	1		The word translated **him** refers to Jesus, since God the Father is the one who makes the Corinthians rich. If **him** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use the words “Christ” or “Christ Jesus” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
29	1CO	1	5	j48t	figs-abstractnouns	παντὶ λόγῳ	1	in all speech	If you cannot use this form in your language, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **word** with a verb. Alternate translation: “everything you speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
30	1CO	1	5	qy8c	figs-abstractnouns	πάσῃ γνώσει	1	all knowledge	If you cannot use this form in your language, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** with a verb. Alternate translation: “everything you know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
31	1CO	1	6	ef38	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καθὼς	1		The word translated **just as** could introduce: (1) the reason why the Corinthians were made rich. Alternate translation: “which is due to how” (2) a comparison that illustrates how the Corinthians were made rich. Alternate translation: “in the same way that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
32	1CO	1	6	ub5r	figs-exmetaphor	τὸ μαρτύριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐβεβαιώθη	1		In this verse, Paul speaks as if what he told the Corinthians about Christ was testimony he gave as a witness in a court of law. This testimony has been **confirmed**, just as if other evidence proved to the judge that his **testimony** was accurate. With this metaphor, he reminds the Corinthians that they have believed the message about Christ and that it is now an important part of their lives. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “our message about Christ has been firmly founded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
33	1CO	1	6	h9zk	figs-possession	τὸ μαρτύριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	the testimony about Christ has been confirmed as true among you	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to speak about a **testimony** that concerns **Christ**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could make it explicit that **Christ** is the content of the **testimony**. Alternate translation: “the testimony about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
34	1CO	1	6	tfo3	figs-activepassive	τὸ μαρτύριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐβεβαιώθη	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this idea in active form with “God” as the subject. Alternate translation: “God has confirmed the testimony of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
35	1CO	1	7	t2hd	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥστε	1	Therefore	The word translated **so that** could introduce: (1) a result from “being made rich” in [1:5](../01/05.md) and from the confirmation of the “testimony” in [1:6](../01/06.md). Alternate translation: “God has made you rich and confirmed our testimony so that” (2) a result from just the confirmation in [1:6](../01/06.md). Alternate translation: “God confirmed our testimony among you so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
36	1CO	1	7	p5y6	figs-litotes	ὑμᾶς μὴ ὑστερεῖσθαι ἐν μηδενὶ χαρίσματι	1	you lack no spiritual gift	Here, Paul uses two negative words, **not** and **lack**, to express a strong positive meaning. He means that the Corinthians have every spiritual gift that God gives. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea in positive form. Alternate translation: “you have every gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
37	1CO	1	7	ymph	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἀπεκδεχομένους	1		The word translated **eagerly waiting for** introduces something that happens at the same time as not lacking **in any gift**. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “while you eagerly wait for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
38	1CO	1	7	fe4q	figs-possession	τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	the revelation of our Lord Jesus Christ	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **revelation** whose content is **our Lord Jesus Christ**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this explicit by translating the phrase with a verb with “God” or **our Lord Jesus Christ** as the subject. Alternate translation: “God to reveal our Lord Jesus Christ” or “our Lord Jesus Christ to be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
39	1CO	1	7	o145	figs-explicit	τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		In this context, it is clear that Paul does not simply mean that knowledge about **our Lord Jesus Christ** will be revealed. Rather, he means that **our Lord Jesus Christ** himself will return to earth. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word such as “return” to make this idea clear. Alternate translation: “the return of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
40	1CO	1	8	cqpk	writing-pronouns	ὃς	1		This pronoun could refer to: (1) God, who is the implied subject of all the verbs in this section. Alternate translation: “It is God who” (2) Jesus, which is the closest name. Alternate translation: “It is Jesus who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
41	1CO	1	8	usci	translate-unknown	καὶ βεβαιώσει ὑμᾶς	1		The word translated **confirm** is the same word that Paul used in [1:6](../01/06.md), also translated “confirmed.” Paul uses the word **also** to remind the reader that he has already used **confirmed**. If possible, translate **confirmed** as you did in [1:6](../01/06.md). Just as there, here it refers to something or someone that is proved to be true or accurate. In this case, it means that God will make the Corinthians’ faith true **to the end**. Alternate translation: “will also firmly found your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
42	1CO	1	8	qtpq	figs-idiom	ἕως τέλους	1		The phrase translated **to the end** means that some activity or state will continue until a definable point in the future. Here, it means that God will **confirm** the Corinthians until their earthly lives end. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “until your race is run” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
43	1CO	1	8	pif5	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀνεγκλήτους	1	you will be blameless	The word translated **blameless** gives the result of God confirming them to the end. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this connection explicit. Alternate translation: “so that you will be blameless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
44	1CO	1	9	hp30	figs-activepassive	δι’ οὗ ἐκλήθητε	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “who called you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
45	1CO	1	9	u2z0	figs-possession<br>	εἰς κοινωνίαν τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **fellowship** that is with **his Son**. If this form would be misunderstood in you language, you could (1) use a word such as “with” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “into fellowship with his Son” (2) translate **fellowship** with a verb such as “share in” or “commune with.” Alternate translation: “to commune with his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
46	1CO	1	9	kx3z	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	his Son	**Son** is an important title for Jesus and describes his relationship with God the Father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
47	1CO	1	10	huz1	grammar-connect-words-phrases	παρακαλῶ δὲ	1		The word translated **now** indicates the beginning of a new section. Paul transitions from giving thanks to appealing to the Corinthians to avoid divisions. You could: (1) leave this word untranslated, and show the shift in topic by starting a new paragraph. Alternate translation: “I urge” (2) use a word or phrase that indicates the beginning of a new section. Alternate translation: “Next, I urge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
48	1CO	1	10	u1u1	figs-infostructure	παρακαλῶ δὲ ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ,	1		In this sentence, **I urge you** is far away from what Paul is urging. If it would be clearer in your language, you could move **I urge you** so that it comes right before **that you all speak**. Alternate translation: “Now brothers, through the name of our Lord Jesus Christ, I urge you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
49	1CO	1	10	k7gw	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although the word translated **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
50	1CO	1	10	sw54	figs-metonymy	διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	through the name of our Lord Jesus Christ	Here, Paul uses the **name** of Jesus to refer to the authority of Jesus. With this language, he reminds the Corinthians that he is an apostle with authority from Jesus. If the meaning of **name** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “on behalf of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
51	1CO	1	10	u4y2	figs-idiom	τὸ αὐτὸ λέγητε πάντες	1	that you all agree	In this language, to **speak the same thing** is an idiom that means that everyone is in agreement, not only in what they speak but also in what they believe and set as goals. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you all see eye to eye” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
52	1CO	1	10	j75c	translate-unknown	σχίσματα	1	that there be no divisions among you	The word translated **divisions** refers to when one group splits into multiple different groups because they have different leaders, beliefs, or opinions. If this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable noun or a short phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “opposing parties” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
53	1CO	1	10	tjkg	translate-unknown	κατηρτισμένοι	1		The word translated **joined together** refers to putting something into its proper position or state, often returning it to that state. Here, then, it refers to restoring the community to the unity it had and is supposed to have. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “restored to your previous unity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
54	1CO	1	10	emt2	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ νοῒ καὶ ἐν τῇ αὐτῇ γνώμῃ	1	be joined together with the same mind and by the same purpose	If you cannot this form in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **mind** and **purpose** with verbs such as “think” and “decide” or “choose.” Alternate translation: “by thinking the same things and by choosing the same things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
55	1CO	1	11	dtsp	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		The word translated **for** introduces the reason why Paul is urging them to become united together. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a short phrase to express the idea. Alternate translation: “I speak this way because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
56	1CO	1	11	tayn	figs-activepassive	ἐδηλώθη…μοι περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί μου, ὑπὸ τῶν Χλόης	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could write this sentence in active form. Alternate translation: “those of Chloe have made it clear to me concerning you, my brothers,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
57	1CO	1	11	ur84	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί μου	1		Although the word translated **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to both men or women. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “my brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
58	1CO	1	11	e8jb	figs-explicit	τῶν Χλόης	1	Chloe’s people	**those of Chloe** refers to people who are connected to Chloe and probably live in her house or work for her. Paul does not tell us whether they are family members, slaves, or employees. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that these people are related to or dependent on Chloe. Alternate translation: “people connected to Chloe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
59	1CO	1	11	fd71	translate-names	Χλόης	1		This is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
60	1CO	1	11	vbe6	translate-unknown	ἔριδες ἐν ὑμῖν εἰσιν	1	there are factions among you	The word translated **factions** refers to quarrels or strife within a community. These quarrels or fights are not physical but verbal. If possible, use a word that refers to verbal conflict or express the idea with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “you have verbal fights with each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
61	1CO	1	12	umbx	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Paul uses the word translated **Now** to introduce a further explanation of what he started talking about in [1:11](../01/11.md). If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave the word untranslated or use a word that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
62	1CO	1	12	tsn6	figs-idiom	λέγω…τοῦτο	1		Here, Paul uses the phrase **I say this** to explain what he meant in the previous verse when he mentioned “factions” ([1:11](../01/11.md)). If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom for explaining what has already been said or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “what I mean is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
63	1CO	1	12	a4lo	figs-explicitinfo	τοῦτο, ὅτι	1		Having both **this** and **that** in this sentence may be redundant in your language. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a simpler way to introduce what Paul wants to “say.” Alternate translation: “that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
64	1CO	1	12	wf0n	figs-hyperbole	ἕκαστος ὑμῶν λέγει	1		Here, Paul uses **each of them** to emphasize that many individuals within the Corinthian congregation are saying these kinds of things. He does not mean that each person says all four of these things. He also does not mean that every single person in the church is making these kinds of claims. Finally, he does not mean that these are the only four claims that they are making. If the form that Paul uses would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that singles out many individuals within a group, and you could add a phrase that indicates that these are examples of what they are saying. Alternate translation: “people in your group say are saying things like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
65	1CO	1	12	vpym	translate-names	Παύλου…Ἀπολλῶ…Κηφᾶ	1		These are the names of three men. Cephas is another name for Peter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
66	1CO	1	12	bfd0	figs-quotations	ἐγὼ μέν εἰμι Παύλου, ἐγὼ δὲ Ἀπολλῶ, ἐγὼ δὲ Κηφᾶ, ἐγὼ δὲ Χριστοῦ	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “that you are of Paul, or you are of Apollos, or you are of Cephas, or you are of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
67	1CO	1	12	a57r	figs-possession	ἐγὼ μέν εἰμι Παύλου, ἐγὼ δὲ Ἀπολλῶ, ἐγὼ δὲ Κηφᾶ, ἐγὼ δὲ Χριστοῦ	1	Each one of you says	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that these people claim to be part of a specific leader’s group. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a word such as “belong” or “follow.” Alternate translation: “‘I follow Paul,’ or ‘I follow Apollos,’ or ‘I follow Cephas,’ or ‘I follow Christ.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
68	1CO	1	13	iam2	figs-123person	μὴ Παῦλος ἐσταυρώθη ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν, ἢ εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Παύλου ἐβαπτίσθητε	1		In this verse, Paul speaks of himself in the third person. This could sound like he is speaking about a different **Paul** than himself. If this use of **Paul** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that Paul is naming himself. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, was not crucified for you, was I? Or were you baptized in my name, that of Paul?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
69	1CO	1	13	wf6r	figs-rquestion	μεμέρισται ὁ Χριστός?	1	Is Christ divided?	Paul asks if **Christ** has **been divided**, but he is not really asking for information. Rather, the question assumes that the answer is “no,” and Paul uses a question to invite the Corinthians to think about how absurd their behavior is. If the meaning of this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “Christ has certainly not been divided!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
70	1CO	1	13	w175	figs-activepassive	μεμέρισται ὁ Χριστός?	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form, with an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “Have they divided Christ?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
71	1CO	1	13	aw2r	figs-metaphor	μεμέρισται ὁ Χριστός	1		Here, Paul speaks as if **Christ** could be **divided** into pieces and given to different groups. He speaks this way because he identifies the church with the body of Christ. If the church is divided into groups, then the body of Christ has been divided up as well. However, it is absurd to think that Christ’s body has been cut up into pieces, so it is also absurd to divide the church into pieces. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “Has Christ’s own body been divided, just as your church has been divided?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
72	1CO	1	13	g5qh	figs-rquestion	μὴ Παῦλος ἐσταυρώθη ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν	1	Was Paul crucified for you?	Paul asks if **Paul was not crucified**, but he is not really asking for information. Rather, the question assumes that the answer is “no,” and Paul uses a question to invite the Corinthians to think about how absurd their thinking is. If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “Paul was certainly not crucified for you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
73	1CO	1	13	lqsy	figs-activepassive	μὴ Παῦλος ἐσταυρώθη ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this idea in active form, with an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “They did not crucify Paul for you, did they?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
74	1CO	1	13	tb2i	figs-rquestion	ἢ εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Παύλου ἐβαπτίσθητε?	1	Were you baptized in the name of Paul?	Paul asks if they **were baptized in the name of Paul**, but he is not really asking for information. Rather, the question assumes that the answer is “no,” and Paul uses a question to invite the Corinthians to think about how absurd their thinking is. If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “You were certainly not baptized in the name of Paul!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
75	1CO	1	13	tii7	figs-activepassive	ἢ εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Παύλου ἐβαπτίσθητε?	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this idea in active form, with a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Or did they baptize you in the name of Paul?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
76	1CO	1	13	zi1y	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Παύλου	1	in the name of Paul	Here, Paul uses the word **name** to refer to authority. What he means is that, when they were baptized, no one used the **name of Paul**, and therefore they do not belong to his group. Instead, he implicitly asserts that they belong to God, whose name would have been used when they were baptized. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea by using the word “authority” or by a phrase that includes the language of “belonging.” Alternate translation: “under the authority of Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
77	1CO	1	14	hhh8	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐδένα ὑμῶν ἐβάπτισα εἰ μὴ	1	none of you, except	If it would appear in your language that Paul is making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword the sentence to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “I baptized only two of you: Crispus and Gaius” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
78	1CO	1	14	vqq6	translate-names	Κρίσπον…Γάϊον	1	Crispus	These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
79	1CO	1	15	hv3m	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	This was so that no one would say that you were baptized into my name	The word translated **so that** introduces a purpose or result. In this case, it introduces what results from Paul not baptizing many of the Corinthians. Because he did not baptize almost any of them, they cannot say that they were baptized into his name. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that indicates result, and you could specify that it is the result of Paul not baptizing many of them. Alternate translation: “The result is that” or “Therefore,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
80	1CO	1	15	dwdv	figs-activepassive	εἰς τὸ ἐμὸν ὄνομα ἐβαπτίσθητε	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could state this in active form with an indefinite subject or with Paul as the subject. Alternate translation: “someone baptized you into my name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
81	1CO	1	15	u8f6	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ἐμὸν ὄνομα	1		Here, just as in [1:13](../01/13.md), Paul uses the word **name** to refer to authority. What he means is that, when they were baptized, no one used Paul’s **name**, and therefore they do not belong to his group. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea by using the word “authority” or by a phrase that includes the language of “belonging.” Alternate translation: “under the my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
82	1CO	1	16	mq74	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, the word translated **Now** interrupts the argument and reintroduces the theme of [1:14](../01/14.md), which is about whom Paul baptized. If this transition would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea by using punctuation that indicates a brief aside or parenthesis, or you could use a phrase that introduces when someone remembers something. Alternate translation: “Speaking of baptizing, I remember that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
83	1CO	1	16	ed59	translate-names	Στεφανᾶ	1	the household of Stephanas	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
84	1CO	1	16	nlzn	translate-unknown	οὐκ οἶδα εἴ τινα ἄλλον ἐβάπτισα	1		This statement could be more or less confident about how many people Paul baptized. It could be: (1) relatively confident that Paul has thought of everyone he baptized. Alternate translation: “I think that this is everyone that I baptized” (2) less confident that Paul has thought of everyone he baptized. Alternate translation: “I do not remember if I baptized any others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
85	1CO	1	16	qbjf	figs-hypo	εἴ	1		Paul here uses the condition introduced by **if** because he wishes to acknowledge that he thinks he has mentioned everyone that he baptized, but he is not sure. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that expresses uncertainty. Alternate translation: “whether” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
86	1CO	1	17	jkfj	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		The word translated **For** introduces an explanation for why Paul has baptized so few people. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that introduces an explanation, and you could clarify that it explains how little he baptizes. Alternate translation: “I only baptized a few people because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
87	1CO	1	17	ga5k	figs-infostructure	οὐ…ἀπέστειλέν με Χριστὸς βαπτίζειν, ἀλλὰ εὐαγγελίζεσθαι	1		If putting the negative statement before the positive statement would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse them and introduce **not with wise speech** by repeating **proclaim**. Alternate translation: “Christ sent me to proclaim the gospel, not to baptize. I proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
88	1CO	1	17	tg7i	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ εὐαγγελίζεσθαι	1	Christ did not send me to baptize	In this clause, Paul has omitted some words that might be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If this sentence would be misunderstood in your language, you could repeat the “sending” language. Alternate translation: “but he sent me to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
89	1CO	1	17	p3cf	figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ λόγου	1		In this clause, Paul has omitted some words that might be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If this sentence would be misunderstood in your language, you could repeat the “proclaiming” language. Alternate translation: “I do not proclaim it with wise speech” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
90	1CO	1	17	u60s	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The word translated **so that** introduces the purpose for which Paul does not use “wise speech.” Here, you could use a word or phrase that normally indicates purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
91	1CO	1	17	zn1n	figs-metaphor	μὴ κενωθῇ ὁ σταυρὸς τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	clever speech … the cross of Christ should not be emptied of its power	Here, Paul speaks as if the **cross of Christ** was a container that was full of power that he does not wish to empty of that power. By this, he means that he does not want to take away the power that the cross and the message about it have. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively, including the idea of power. Alternate translation: “the cross of Christ would not lose its power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
92	1CO	1	17	qdyj	figs-activepassive	μὴ κενωθῇ ὁ σταυρὸς τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this idea in active form, with Paul as the subject. Alternate translation: “I would not empty the cross of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
93	1CO	1	18	j7cw	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Connecting Statement:	The word translated **For** introduces an explanation of the last part of [1:17](../01/17.md). In this verse, then, Paul explains further why he does not use wise speech. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that introduces an explanation, and you could briefly restate what Paul is explaining. Alternate translation: “I speak in this way because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
94	1CO	1	18	fq4x	figs-possession	ὁ λόγος…ὁ τοῦ σταυροῦ	1	the message about the cross	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to speak about a **word** that is about **the cross**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that the **cross** is the content of the **word**. Alternate translation: “the word about the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
95	1CO	1	18	utr3	figs-metonymy	τοῦ σταυροῦ	1		Here, the word **cross** stands for the event in which Jesus died on the cross. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could include Jesus’ death in your translation. Alternate translation: “of Jesus’s death on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
96	1CO	1	18	p4wb	figs-abstractnouns	μωρία ἐστίν	1	is foolishness	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **foolishness** by translating it as an adjective such as “foolish.” Alternate translation: “seems foolish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
97	1CO	1	18	lq5z	figs-activepassive	τοῖς…ἀπολλυμένοις	1	to those who are dying	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this in active form, with: (1) themselves as the subject. Alternate translation: “to those who will experience destruction” (2) God as the subject. Alternate translation: “to those whom God will destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
98	1CO	1	18	ao4m	figs-activepassive	τοῖς δὲ σῳζομένοις ἡμῖν	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this clause in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “but to us whom God is saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
99	1CO	1	18	m66w	figs-distinguish	τοῖς δὲ σῳζομένοις ἡμῖν	1		The description **who are being saved** distinguishes **us** from anyone else. It is not just adding information. Use a form in your language that shows that this is a distinguishing phrase. Alternate translation: “but to us, that is, the ones who are being saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
100	1CO	1	18	ji74	figs-possession	δύναμις Θεοῦ ἐστιν	1	it is the power of God	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **power** that comes from **God**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that **God** is the source of the **power**. Alternate translation: “power from God” or “God working in power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
101	1CO	1	19	fdhk	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1		Here, the word translated **For** introduces Paul’s evidence that what he said in [1:18](../01/18.md) is true. You could use a word that introduces evidence for a claim or leave the word untranslated. Alternate translation: “As” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
102	1CO	1	19	wx5x	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this in active form, with: (1) the scripture or scripture author as the subject. Alternate translation: “Isaiah has written” (2) God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
103	1CO	1	19	tc6n	figs-quotations	ἀπολῶ τὴν σοφίαν τῶν σοφῶν, καὶ τὴν σύνεσιν τῶν συνετῶν ἀθετήσω	1	I will frustrate the understanding of the intelligent	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate this direct quote as an indirect quote, specifying that God is the subject and including an introductory word such as “that.” Alternate translation: “that God will destroy the wisdom of the wise, and he will frustrate the understanding of the intelligent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
104	1CO	1	19	kzb0	figs-possession	τὴν σοφίαν τῶν σοφῶν…τὴν σύνεσιν τῶν συνετῶν	1		In both of these clauses, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **wisdom** or **understanding** that belongs to **the wise** or **the intelligent**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could indicate that **wisdom** and **understanding** belong to **the wise** or **the intelligent**. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that the wise have … the understanding that the intelligent have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
105	1CO	1	19	gft6	figs-nominaladj	τῶν σοφῶν…τῶν συνετῶν	1		Paul is using the adjectives **wise** and **intelligent** as nouns in order to describe groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “of the people who are wise … of the people who are intelligent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
106	1CO	1	19	pa5n	translate-unknown	τῶν συνετῶν	1		The word translated **intelligent** describes someone who is good at figuring problems out, understanding new ideas, and making smart decisions. Use a word in your language that gets this general idea across. Alternate translation: “of the smart” or “of the clever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
107	1CO	1	20	m6tf	figs-rquestion	ποῦ σοφός? ποῦ γραμματεύς? ποῦ συνζητητὴς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου?	1	Where is the wise person? Where is the scholar? Where is the debater of this world?	With these questions, Paul is not actually asking about the location of certain people. Rather, he is suggesting to the Corinthians that these kinds of people cannot be found. If these questions would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with statements that: (1) assert that these people do not actually have real wisdom, knowledge, or skill. Alternate translation: “The wise person does not really have wisdom. The scholar does not really know much. The debater of this age is not really good at arguing” (2) assert that these people do not exist. Alternate translation: “There is no wise person. There is no scholar. There is no debater of this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
108	1CO	1	20	h0qa	figs-genericnoun	σοφός…γραμματεύς…συνζητητὴς	1		Paul uses these singular nouns to identify types of people, but he does not mean just one **wise person**, **scholar**, or **debater**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a form that identifies a type of person, or you could translate these nouns in plural form. Alternate translation: “the kind of person who has wisdom … the kind of person who is a scholar … the kind of person who is a debater” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
109	1CO	1	20	mzxx	figs-possession	συνζητητὴς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **debater** who is part of **this age**. In fact, Paul may mean that the **wise person** and the **scholar** also belong to **this age**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the debater, who belongs in this age” or “the debater? All these kinds of people belong to this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
110	1CO	1	20	u5j5	translate-unknown	συνζητητὴς	1	the debater	The word translated **debater** refers to someone who spends much of their time arguing about beliefs, values, or actions. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a short phrase or a term that expresses this idea better. Alternate translation: “the disputant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
111	1CO	1	20	a7zl	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ ἐμώρανεν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ κόσμου?	1	Has not God turned the wisdom of the world into foolishness?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a statement. Alternate translation: “ God has turned the wisdom of the world into foolishness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
112	1CO	1	20	y5wx	figs-possession	τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ κόσμου	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **wisdom** that seems wise according to the standard of this **world**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that this world values” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
113	1CO	1	21	cihg	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		The word translated **For** introduces an explanation of how God has turned the wisdom of the world into foolishness ([1:20](../01/20.md)). You could use a word that introduces an explanation in your language or a short phrase that identifies that this verse explains the previous verse. Alternate translation: “That is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
114	1CO	1	21	eauj	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐπειδὴ…οὐκ ἔγνω ὁ κόσμος διὰ τῆς σοφίας τὸν Θεόν, εὐδόκησεν ὁ Θεὸς	1		The word translated **since** introduces the reason for the second half of the verse, beginning with **God was pleased**. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this more explicit or break the two pieces into two sentences and use a transition word that indicates result. Alternate translation: “because … the world did not know God through wisdom, therefore God was pleased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
115	1CO	1	21	tnez	figs-possession	ἐν τῇ σοφίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **wisdom** that **God** uses when he makes decisions or acts. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by adding “plans” or “thinking” and translating **wisdom** with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “in God’s wise plan” or ”in God’s wise thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
116	1CO	1	21	odyk	figs-synecdoche	ὁ κόσμος	1		Here, Paul uses the word translated **world** to refer to the humans that are part of the **world**. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate **world** with a word or phrase that refers to people who do not believe in Christ, or you could use a phrase like “people of the world.” Alternate translation: “the people of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
117	1CO	1	21	d7xw	figs-possession	τῆς μωρίας τοῦ κηρύγματος	1	those who believe	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **preaching** that is characterized by **foolishness**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating **foolishness** as an adjective describing **the preaching** or the content of **the preaching**. Alternate translation: “the foolish preaching” or “the foolish message that we preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
118	1CO	1	21	lkk1	figs-irony	τῆς μωρίας	1		Paul describes the **preaching** as **foolishness**. He does not actually think his message is foolish. Instead, he speaks from the perspective of **the world** and its **wisdom**, because the message is foolish to **the world**. If this way of speaking would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that indicates that Paul is using irony or speaking from another person's perspective. Alternate translation: “the so-called foolishness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
119	1CO	1	22	j8nh	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἐπειδὴ καὶ	1		The word translated **For** sets up the contrast between this verse and what Paul preaches in the next verse. If your language has a way to begin a contrast, you could use it here. Otherwise, you could leave the word untranslated. Alternate translation: “It is indeed true that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
120	1CO	1	22	e1sy	figs-hyperbole	Ἰουδαῖοι…Ἕλληνες	1		By using the words translated **Jews** and **Greeks**, Paul is not saying that every single Jewish and Greek person does these things. Instead, he is generalizing, identifying common patterns among people who are Jewish and Greek. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that not all **Jews** and **Greeks** are meant. Alternate translation: “most Jews … most Greeks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
121	1CO	1	22	t32r	translate-unknown	Ἕλληνες	1		The word translated **Greeks** does not refer only to people who are ethnically Greek. However, it also does not refer to everyone who is not a Jew. Rather, it refers to people who speak the Greek language and who value the philosophy and education that are part of Greek culture. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies these people by their interests and values more than by their ethnicity. Alternate translation: “people who value Greek philosophy” or “people who had a Greek education” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
122	1CO	1	23	q8sj	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here, Paul continues the contrast he set up in [1:22](../01/22.md). Jews seek signs, and Greeks seek wisdom, but Paul and those like him proclaim that the Messiah was crucified. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates a strong contrast between behavior or beliefs. Alternate translation: “In contrast with them,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
123	1CO	1	23	v9fa	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	General Information:	Here, the word **we** refers to Paul and others who proclaim the Gospel with him. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
124	1CO	1	23	ntu3	figs-activepassive	Χριστὸν ἐσταυρωμένον	1	Christ crucified	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could state this in active form, with: (1) **Christ** as the subject. Alternate translation: “that Christ laid down his life on the cross” (2) an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “that they crucified Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
125	1CO	1	23	krw3	figs-metaphor	σκάνδαλον	1	a stumbling block	Paul uses the word translated **stumbling block** to indicate that the message about “Christ crucified” causes offense or repulses many Jews. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “a repulsive concept” or “an unacceptable idea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
126	1CO	1	23	n6u2	figs-hyperbole	Ἰουδαίοις…ἔθνεσιν	1		By using the words translated **Jews** and **Gentiles**, Paul is not saying that every single Jewish and Gentile person responds to the Gospel in these ways. Instead, he is generalizing, identifying common patterns among people who are Jewish and Gentile. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that not all **Jews** and **Gentiles** are meant. Alternate translation: “to most Jews … to most Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
127	1CO	1	24	xgw1	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here, Paul uses the word translated **But** to contrast **those who are called** and the “Jews” and “Gentiles” in [1:23](../01/23.md). If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that contrasts people and their thinking. Alternate translation: “In contrast with them,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
128	1CO	1	24	i7l4	figs-infostructure	αὐτοῖς…τοῖς κλητοῖς, Ἰουδαίοις τε καὶ Ἕλλησιν, Χριστὸν Θεοῦ δύναμιν, καὶ Θεοῦ σοφίαν	1		Paul here puts the people he is talking about first before he makes a statement about them. If this is unnatural in your language, you could: (1) phrase the sentence so that **those who are called** is the subject of the whole sentence. Alternate translation: “those who are called, both Jews and Greeks, know that Christ {is} the power of God and the wisdom of God” (2) move **to those who are called** to the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Christ {is} the power of God and the wisdom of God to those who are called, both Jews and Greeks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
129	1CO	1	24	h7iw	figs-123person	αὐτοῖς…τοῖς κλητοῖς	1	to those whom God has called	Paul uses the third person to speak about those whom God has called because he is speaking of the group as a category in comparison with Jews who find the Gospel a stumbling block and Gentiles who find the Gospel to be foolish. He does not use the third person because he excludes himself or the Corinthians from this category. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with the first person. Alternate translation: “to those of us who are called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
130	1CO	1	24	appp	figs-activepassive	τοῖς κλητοῖς	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could write this in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “whom God has called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
131	1CO	1	24	pt5x	translate-unknown	Ἕλλησιν	1		The word translated **Greeks** does not refer only to people who are ethnically Greek. However, it also does not refer to everyone who is not a Jew. Rather, it refers to people who speak the Greek language and who value the philosophy and education that are part of Greek culture. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies these people by their interests and values more than by their ethnicity. Alternate translation: “people who value Greek philosophy” or “people who had a Greek education” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
132	1CO	1	24	hu1s	figs-metonymy	Χριστὸν	1	Christ as the power and the wisdom of God	Here, the word **Christ** could refer to: (1) the message about the work of Christ. Alternate translation: “the message about Christ” (2) the work of Christ, especially his death. Alternate translation: “Christ’s work” or “Christ’s death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
133	1CO	1	24	w9vm	figs-possession	Θεοῦ δύναμιν	1	the power … of God	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **power** that comes from **God**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that **God** is the source of the **power**. Alternate translation: “power from God” or “God acting powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
134	1CO	1	24	p1hu	figs-possession	Θεοῦ σοφίαν	1	the wisdom of God	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **wisdom** that comes from **God**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that **God** is the source of the **wisdom**. Alternate translation: “wisdom from God” or “God giving wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
135	1CO	1	25	fst8	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1		With the word translated **For**, Paul introduces the reason why the seemingly foolish message about Christ is power and wisdom ([1:24](../01/24.md)). If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that introduces a reason or a short phrase that connects this verse to the previous verse or verses. Alternate translation: “God works through foolishness because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
136	1CO	1	25	h9hh	figs-irony	τὸ μωρὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ…τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the foolishness of God is wiser than people, and the weakness of God is stronger than people	Paul describes God as having **foolishness** and **weakness**. He does not actually think that God is weak and foolish, but he is speaking from the perspective of the world and its wisdom. From the perspective of the world, Paul’s God is indeed foolish and weak. What Paul means to say is that what the world sees as **foolishness** and **weakness** is still **wiser** and **stronger** than anything that humans have to offer. If this way of speaking would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that indicates that Paul is using irony or speaking from another person's perspective. Alternate translation: “the apparent foolishness of God … the apparent weakness of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
137	1CO	1	25	esc9	figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀνθρώπων	-1		The words translated **men** in both places in this verse do not refer just to male people. Rather, Paul means any human of any sex. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use both genders or a gender-neutral word. Alternate translation: “women and men … women and men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
138	1CO	1	25	jydy	figs-possession	τὸ μωρὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ…ἐστίν	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **foolishness** that comes from **God**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a phrase that indicates that **God** does **foolishness**. Alternate translation: “the foolish things that God does are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
139	1CO	1	25	uciw	figs-ellipsis	σοφώτερον τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἐστίν	1		Paul does not say everything that is needed in many languages to make a complete comparison. If the sentence would be misunderstood in your language, you could add whatever is needed to make the comparison complete, such “the wisdom.” Alternate translation: “is wiser than the wisdom of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
140	1CO	1	25	gnpe	figs-possession	τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **weakness** that comes from **God**. If it this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this idea with a phrase that indicates that **God** does **weakness**. Alternate translation: “the weak things that God does {are}” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
141	1CO	1	25	i7pl	figs-ellipsis	ἰσχυρότερον τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1		Paul does not say everything that is needed in many languages to make a complete comparison. If this sentence would be misunderstood in your language, you could add whatever is needed to make the comparison complete, such “the strength.” Alternate translation: “stronger than the strength of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
142	1CO	1	26	je03	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word translated **For** introduces proof for or examples of what Paul has claimed so far about God choosing to work through foolishness and weakness. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces examples or support. Alternate translation: “For instance,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
143	1CO	1	26	c8sf	translate-unknown	τὴν κλῆσιν ὑμῶν	1		Here, the word translated **calling** primarily to who they were at the time of their **calling**. It does not primarily refer to God’s act in **calling** them. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood language, you can emphasize this aspect in your translation. Alternate translation: “who you were at your calling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
144	1CO	1	26	xq6b	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1		Here, the word translated **brothers** does not just refer to men but to people of any sex. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could: (1) use a non-gendered word. Alternate translation: “siblings” (2) use words for both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
145	1CO	1	26	w6l1	figs-litotes	οὐ πολλοὶ	-1	Not many of you	Here, Paul uses a form that can more easily be stated in inverse form in many languages. If: (1) your language would most naturally put **not** with the verb instead of **many**, you could do so here. Alternate translation: “many {were} not … many {were} not … and many {were} not” (2) your language would most naturally use a word that indicates a small number of people here, you could use it without **not**. Alternate translation: “few … few … and few” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
146	1CO	1	26	unig	writing-pronouns	οὐ πολλοὶ	-1		While Paul does not explicitly state that **not many** refers to the Corinthians, he is referring to the Corinthians when he says **not many**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could insert “you.” Alternate translation: “not many of you … not many of you … and not many of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
147	1CO	1	26	camj	figs-infostructure	οὐ πολλοὶ σοφοὶ κατὰ σάρκα, οὐ πολλοὶ δυνατοί, οὐ πολλοὶ εὐγενεῖς	1		Paul here uses the phrase **according to the flesh** to clarify what he means by **wise**, **powerful**, and **of noble birth**, not just **wise**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could move **according to the flesh** so that it is clear that it modifies all three of these statements. Alternate translation: “according to the flesh, not many {were} wise, not many {were} powerful, and not many {were} of noble birth (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
148	1CO	1	26	pws2	figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	wise according to the flesh	Here, Paul uses the phrase **according to the flesh** to refer to human ways of thinking. If the meaning of thsi phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idiom **according to the flesh** with a phrase that refers to human values or perspectives. Alternate translation: “according to human definitions” or “according to what humans value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
149	1CO	1	27	qjvd	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		Here, Paul introduces a contrast. hH is contrasting **God chose the foolish things** with what a person might expect about how God would treat foolish and weak people like the Corinthians. He is not contrasting how **God chose the foolish things** with the statements in the previous verse about the foolishness and weakness of the Corinthians. If this contrast would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that Paul writes **But** to contrast with what a person might expect about God. Alternate translation: “Despite what might be expected,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
150	1CO	1	27	qv5l	figs-parallelism	τοῦ κόσμου ἐξελέξατο ὁ Θεός, ἵνα καταισχύνῃ…τοῦ κόσμου ἐξελέξατο ὁ Θεός, ἵνα καταισχύνῃ	2	God chose … wise. God chose … strong	Here, Paul repeats the exact same words: **God chose … in order that he might shame**. He does this because repeating the same idea with different examples was more convincing than just one example in his culture. If possible, translate these words the same way in both parts of the sentence to preserve the parallelism. If it is necessary, you could remove or change some of the words if it makes the sentence sound more convincing, which is what Paul intended. Alternate translation: “God chose … of the world in order that he might shame … he chose … of the world to shame” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
151	1CO	1	27	r4ly	figs-possession	τὰ μωρὰ τοῦ κόσμου…τὰ ἀσθενῆ τοῦ κόσμου	1		Paul uses the possessive form twice to clarify that the **foolish things** and **weak things** are only **foolish** and **weak** from the perspective of the **world**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a phrase such as “according to the world.” Alternate translation: “things that are foolish according to the world … things that are weak according to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
152	1CO	1	27	gdob	figs-synecdoche	τοῦ κόσμου	-1		When Paul uses **the world** in this context, he is not referring primarily to everything that God has made. Rather, he uses **the world** to refer to human beings. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that refers to human beings in general. Alternate translation: “of people … of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
153	1CO	1	27	iwho	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	-1		Here, the word translated **in order that** could introduce: (1) the purpose for which **God chose the foolish things of the world** and **the weak things of the world**. Alternate translation: “so that … so that” (2) what happened when **God chose the foolish things of the world** and **the weak things of the world**. Alternate translation: “with the result that … with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
154	1CO	1	27	vtzx	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς σοφούς…τὰ ἰσχυρά	1		Paul uses the adjective **wise** to describe a group of people, and he uses the adjective **strong** to describe a group of people and things. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these two adjectives with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are wise … people and things which are strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
155	1CO	1	28	tqxg	figs-parallelism	τοῦ κόσμου…ἐξελέξατο ὁ Θεός,…ἵνα	1		In this verse, Paul repeats many of the words from the parallel parts of previous verse. He does this because repeating the same idea with different examples was more convincing than just one example in his culture. If possible, translate these words the same way that you translated them in [1:27](../01/27.md). If it is necessary, you could remove or change some of the words if it makes the sentence sound more convincing, which is what Paul intended. Alternate translation: “he chose … of the world … in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
156	1CO	1	28	k3kd	translate-unknown	τὰ ἀγενῆ	1	what is low and despised	The word translated **base things** is the opposite of the word translated “of noble birth” in [1:26](../01/26.md). Paul uses it to refer to things and people that were not considered important or powerful in his culture. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to people and things that have low status or low importance. Alternate translation: “the marginalized things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
157	1CO	1	28	d5pa	translate-unknown	τὰ ἐξουθενημένα	1		While the word translated **base things** refers to a person's status or a thing's status, the word translated **despised things** refers to how people treat other people or things that have low status. Usually, people badly treat others whom they consider to be of lower status, ignoring them or mocking them. That is what Paul means when he says **despised**. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how people treat others of lower status badly. Alternate translation: “the scorned things” or “the things people treat with contempt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
158	1CO	1	28	wir6	figs-possession	τὰ ἀγενῆ τοῦ κόσμου καὶ τὰ ἐξουθενημένα	1		Here, Paul uses **of the world** to describe both **the base things** and **the despised things**. As in [1:27](../01/27.md), he uses the possessive form to clarify that **base things and the despised things** are only **base** and **despised** from the perspective of the world. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a phrase such as “according to the world.” Alternate translation: “the base things and the despised things according to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
159	1CO	1	28	unyl	figs-synecdoche	τοῦ κόσμου	1		When Paul uses **the world** in this context, he is not referring primarily to everything that God has made. Rather, he uses **the world** to refer to human beings. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that refers to human beings in general. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche)
160	1CO	1	28	gj19	figs-hyperbole	τὰ μὴ ὄντα	1	nothing, to bring to nothing things that are held as valuable	Here, Paul further describes the **base things** and **the despised things** as if they were **things that are not**. He does not mean that the **base** and **despised things** do not exist. Instead, he is identifying how people often ignore the **base** and **despised things**, just as if they did not exist at all. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the things that people ignore” or “the nobodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
161	1CO	1	28	f11p	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	things that are held as valuable	Here, the word translated **in order that** could introduce: (1) the purpose for which **God chose the base things and the despised things of the world, the things that are not**. Alternate translation: “so that” (2) what happened when **God chose the base things and the despised things of the world, the things that are not**. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal)
162	1CO	1	28	f9s5	translate-unknown	καταργήσῃ	1		The word translated **he might bring to nothing** refers to making something ineffective, useless, or irrelevant. What Paul means is that God has made **the things that are** unimportant and without function because he instead worked through **the things that are not**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that a person has acted so that something else is no longer important, useful, or effective. Alternate translation: “he might sideline” or “render ineffective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
163	1CO	1	28	etjg	figs-idiom	τὰ ὄντα	1		In this context, **the things that are** does not refer primarily to things that exist. Rather, it refers primarily to things that are important in society and culture. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that refers to important or significant things and people in your culture. Alternate translation: “the things that people care about” or “the somebodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
164	1CO	1	29	unr6	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ὅπως	1		The word translated **so that** introduces a final goal. In [1:28–29](../01/28–29.md), Paul uses “in order that” to introduce immediate goals, but here, **so that** is the overall goal. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a final or overall goal, making sure to distinguish it from the words you used in [1:28–29](../01/28–29.md), if possible. Alternate translation: “so that, in the end,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
165	1CO	1	29	q4gh	figs-idiom	μὴ…πᾶσα σὰρξ	1		Paul uses the word **flesh** to refer to humans. Unlike in other places in his letters, **flesh** does not indicate sinful and weak humanity. Instead, it simply refers to humans compared to their creator, God. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that commonly refers to people in general, especially if it includes the idea that people are created by God. Alternate translation: “no creature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
166	1CO	1	29	fdv5	figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul speaks of people not boasting **before God**, as if they were standing in front of **God**. With this way of talking, Paul means that people are acting as if they could see God and God could see them. This means that they recognize that God knows what they say and do. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that someone recognizes that God knows what they are doing and thinking. Alternate translation: “when they know that God sees them” or “while God looks on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
167	1CO	1	30	yk4y	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		The word translated **But** introduces a slight contrast between people who might boast and the Corinthians, who are united to Christ. However, **But** primarily means that Paul is moving to the next step in his argument. If **But** would not express this idea in your language, you could use a word that indicates that the author is moving on to the next step, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
168	1CO	1	30	fmr3	figs-activepassive	ἐξ αὐτοῦ…ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	because of him	While **because of him, you are in Christ Jesus** is not written the way most passive sentences are, this construction is like a passive sentence and may be difficult to represent in your language. What **because of him** means is that God is the source of how the Corinthians **are in Christ Jesus**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could rephrase these words so that “God” is the subject who makes it so that **you are in Christ Jesus**. Alternate translation: “he puts you in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
169	1CO	1	30	alyj	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1		The word translated **of him** refers to God. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use the name “God” here. Alternate translation: “of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
170	1CO	1	30	a986	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ Jesus** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ Jesus**, or united to Christ Jesus, explains how **Christ Jesus** can be **wisdom**, **righteousness**, **sanctification**, and **redemption** for the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
171	1CO	1	30	f1at	figs-metaphor	ὃς ἐγενήθη σοφία ἡμῖν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ, δικαιοσύνη τε, καὶ ἁγιασμὸς, καὶ ἀπολύτρωσις;	1	Christ Jesus, who was made for us wisdom from God	Here, Paul uses language and structure that is very similar to what he used in [1:24](../01/24.md). Refer back to that verse to help you translate this verse. When Paul says that Jesus **was made … wisdom** and **righteousness, and also sanctification and redemption**, he does not mean that Jesus has become these abstract ideas. Instead, he means that Jesus is the source of **wisdom**, **righteousness**, **sanctification**, and **redemption** for **us** who are **in Christ Jesus**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could include some clarifying words such as “the source of.” Alternate translation: “who was made for us the source of wisdom from God, the source of righteousness, and also the source of sanctification and redemption” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
172	1CO	1	30	lxpy	figs-activepassive	ὃς ἐγενήθη σοφία ἡμῖν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ	1		If you cannot write **who was made for us wisdom from God** in this form, you could state it in active form. Alternate translation: “whom God made for us wisdom from himself” or “whom God made for us wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
173	1CO	1	30	yyns	writing-pronouns	ὃς	1		The word **who** refers to **Christ Jesus**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could write the name of **Christ Jesus** instead of using **who** or along with **who**. Alternate translation: “the Christ who” or (starting a new sentence) “Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
174	1CO	1	30	g5um	figs-abstractnouns	σοφία…ἀπὸ Θεοῦ, δικαιοσύνη τε, καὶ ἁγιασμὸς, καὶ ἀπολύτρωσις	1		If you cannot write the abstract nouns **wisdom**, **righteousness**, **sanctification**, and **redemption** in your language, you could express their meaning by using verbs with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “a person through whom God taught us, judged us not guilty, and also set us apart for himself and set us free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
175	1CO	1	31	dm5h	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἵνα	1		Paul uses the word translated **so that** to introduce (1) the result of everything he has said about God being the one who chooses and acts. Alternate translation: (starting a new sentence) “Because of all this” or “Therefore” (2) the purpose for which God chose the weak and foolish. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
176	1CO	1	31	gtv0	figs-ellipsis	ἵνα καθὼς γέγραπται	1		Here, Paul leaves out some words that might be required in your language to make a complete thought. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply the needed words, such as “we should do.” Alternate translation: “so that we should behave just as it is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
177	1CO	1	31	paga	figs-infostructure	καθὼς γέγραπται, ὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω	1		If it would be unnatural in your language to put **just as it is written** before the quotation, you could put **just as it is written** at the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “‘Let the one who boasts, boast in the Lord,’ just as it is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
178	1CO	1	31	ebvw	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		In Paul’s culture, **just as it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book written by Jeremiah the prophet. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament” or “according to Jeremiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
179	1CO	1	31	fym9	figs-imperative	ὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω	1	Let the one who boasts, boast in the Lord	Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could (1) translate this one as a conditional sentence, adding “if.” Alternate translation: “If people want to boast, they should boast in the Lord” (2) translate this one using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “Anyone who boasts should boast in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
180	1CO	1	31	mo0q	figs-idiom	ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω	1		When Paul says that someone can **boast in the Lord**, he does not mean that they are inside **the Lord**. Rather, he means that they are boasting about **the Lord** and what he has done. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that someone is boasting about someone else. Alternate translation: “Let … boast with reference to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
181	1CO	2	intro	k86p			0		# 1 Corinthians 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)<br> * Paul’s attitude among the Corinthians (2:1–5)<br> * The wisdom of God, revealed by the Spirit (2:6–16)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verses 9 and 16, which are from the Old Testament. Verse 9 quotes from Isaiah 64:4, and verse 16 quotes from Isaiah 40. <br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Wisdom and foolishness<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both wisdom and foolishness. Just as in chapter one, these words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. Continue to use the words you chose in chapter one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fool]])<br><br>### Power and weakness<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both power and weakness. Just as in chapter one, these words primarily refer to how much influence and authority a person has and to how much they can accomplish. Someone who has “power” has much influence and authority and can accomplish many things. Someone who has “weakness” does not have much influence and authority and is not able to accomplish many things. Continue to use the words that you chose in chapter one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/power]])<br><br>### The Spirit<br><br>Paul first mentions the “Spirit” in this chapter. In most places where this word appears, it refers to God’s Spirit (the Holy Spirit), who is the third person of the Trinity. However, in two places in this chapter, the word “spirit” refers to something else. First, “spirit of the world” in [2:12](../02/12.md) refers to a “spirit” that is not God’s Spirit and that originates from within the world. Paul says that this kind of “spirit” is not the kind that believers in Jesus have received. Second, the “spirit of a man” in [2:11](../02/11.md) refers to the non-physical part of a person. It does not refer to God’s Spirit or to something that God’s Spirit replaces. Sometimes Paul uses the adjective form “spiritual” ([2:13](../02/13.md); [2:15](../02/15.md)) and the adverb form “spiritually” ([2:14](../02/14.md)). Both of these forms also refer to God’s Spirit. If someone or something is “spiritual,” that means that the person or thing has or is characterized by God’s Spirit. If something is done “spiritually,” that means that it is done by the power of God’s Spirit. Once, Paul uses the word “natural” ([2:14](../02/14.md)), which is the opposite of “spiritual.” “Natural” means that the person or thing does not have and is not characterized by God’s Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])<br><br>### The Mystery<br><br>Paul speaks of a “mystery” in [2:1](../02/01.md); [2:7](../02/07.md). This “mystery” is not some secret truth that is hard to understand and that only a few privileged individuals can learn about. Instead, it refers to God’s plans that once were unknown but are now known to all his people. As Paul has already stated in chapter one, these plans center around the cross, which seems to be foolishness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### The deep things of God<br><br>In [2:10](../02/10.md), Paul says that the Spirit searches “the deep things of God.” Paul talks about God as if he were a well or a lake with parts that are deep down in order to identify things about God that humans cannot understand or find it difficult to understand. He does not mean that God is a being or location with deep parts. See the note on this verse for translation options. <br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### The rulers of this age<br><br>In [2:6](../02/06.md); [2:8](../02/08.md), Paul speaks about “the rulers of this age.” This phrase refers to individuals who have power in the created world during the time between Christ’s first and second comings. While Paul does not state whether these individuals with power are humans or spiritual beings, he does say that they were the ones who crucified Jesus ([2:8](../02/08.md)). This suggests that they are humans, and they would be people like governors, emperors, and unfaithful religious leaders. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/ruler]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/age]])<br><br>### Positive and negative uses of “wisdom”<br><br>Just as in chapter one, Paul continues to speak about wisdom in both positive and negative ways. He uses the same words throughout the chapter, and he distinguishes between positive and negative meanings by connecting the words to different people or ideas. For example, he speaks of wisdom negatively when it is the wisdom of the world, or the wisdom of humans. However, he speaks of wisdom positively when it is wisdom from God or wisdom given by God. If possible, translate the negative and positive meanings of wisdom with the same word, just as Paul uses one word for both negative and positive. If you must use different words, use positive words for God’s wisdom and negative words for human wisdom. <br><br>### First person singular and plural<br><br>Paul uses the first person singular in [2:1–5](../02/01–05.md) because in these verses he speaks of his own time among the Corinthians. He switches to the first person plural in [2:6–16](../02/06–16.md) because in these verses he is speaking more generally about everyone who proclaims the Gospel as he does. In [2:6–16](../02/06–16.md), the first person plural sometimes includes the Corinthians and sometimes does not include the Corinthians. Throughout the chapter, the first person plural will include the Corinthians unless a note specifies that it does not include them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
182	1CO	2	1	pxmq	grammar-connect-words-phrases	κἀγὼ	1		Here, the word translated **And I** introduces how Paul himself fits into the pattern he introduced in the last chapter. Just as God chooses the weak and the foolish, Paul preaches the Gospel in weak and foolish ways. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that introduces an example or a comparison. Alternate translation: “In the same way, I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
183	1CO	2	1	qvj7	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although the word translated **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to both men or women. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
184	1CO	2	1	koh8	figs-explicitinfo	ἐλθὼν πρὸς ὑμᾶς…ἦλθον οὐ	1		Here, Paul twice says that he has **come** to them. This is a structure that makes sense in Paul’s language. However, if this repetition would be misunderstood in your language, you could: (1) translate the first **come** with a different word, such as “visit.” Alternate translation: “having visited you, did not come” (2) combine these two phrases. Alternate translation: “did not come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
185	1CO	2	1	o0vw	grammar-connect-time-background	ἐλθὼν πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1		The phrase **having come to you** gives background information. It describes what happened before Paul **did not come with superiority of speech or of wisdom**. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify by using a word that introduces action that has already occurred. Alternate translation: “after I came to you” or “when I came to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
186	1CO	2	1	o3ks	figs-possession	ὑπεροχὴν λόγου ἢ σοφίας	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **speech** and **wisdom** that have **superiority**. If the meaning of this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating **superiority** as an adjective. Alternate translation: “superior speech or superior wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
187	1CO	2	1	ikmt	translate-unknown	ὑπεροχὴν λόγου ἢ σοφίας	1		The word translated **superiority** refers to how something or someone has more authority, skill, knowledge, or power than something or someone else. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable word or a short description. Alternate translation: “greatness of speech or of wisdom” or “speech or wisdom that was better than what others have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
188	1CO	2	1	kxie	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	καταγγέλλων ὑμῖν τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		The phrase **proclaiming to you the mystery of God** gives the situation in which Paul **did not come with superiority of speech or of wisdom**. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could make it explicit by including a word that indicates that these things are happening at the same time. Alternate translation: “when I proclaimed to you the mystery of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
189	1CO	2	1	nam8	figs-possession	τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **mystery** that is: (1) revealed by God. Alternate translation: “the mystery given by God” or “the mystery from God” (2) about God. Alternate translation: “the mystery about God” or “the mystery concerning God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
190	1CO	2	2	a2g9	figs-hyperbole	οὐ…ἔκρινά τι εἰδέναι ἐν ὑμῖν, εἰ μὴ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν	1	I decided to know nothing … except Jesus Christ	Here, Paul speaks as if he decides to forget all his knowledge and become ignorant of everything except for **Jesus Christ**. This is an exaggeration that Paul uses to emphasize his focus on **Jesus Christ** as the one thing he wished to tell the Corinthians about. If this exaggeration would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that it is an exaggeration or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I decided to speak among you only about Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
191	1CO	2	2	nk9r	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐ…ἔκρινά τι εἰδέναι ἐν ὑμῖν, εἰ μὴ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν, καὶ τοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον	1		If it would appear in your language that Paul makes a strong statement about knowing nothing and then contradicts it, you could reword this sentence so that there is no **except**. Alternate translation: “I decided that I would only know among you Jesus Christ and him crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
192	1CO	2	2	zvge	figs-activepassive	τοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form, using a phrase such as “he died on the cross” or adding a vague subject. Alternate translation: “how they crucified him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
193	1CO	2	3	xen3	grammar-connect-words-phrases	κἀγὼ	1		Here, the word translated **And I** is the same word Paul used to introduce [2:1](../02/01.md). It again introduces how Paul himself fits into the pattern he introduced in the last chapter. Just as God chooses the weak and the foolish, Paul himself was weak and foolish. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that introduces an example or a comparison. Alternate translation: “Just as I did not use superior words and wisdom, I myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
194	1CO	2	3	s9lp		κἀγὼ…ἐγενόμην πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	I was with you	Alternate translation: “And I remained with you”
195	1CO	2	3	e8li	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ, καὶ ἐν φόβῳ, καὶ ἐν τρόμῳ πολλῷ,	1	in weakness	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **weakness**, **fear**, and **trembling** with adjectives or verbs. Alternate translation: “as a weak, afraid, and frequently trembling person” or “while I ailed, feared, and often trembled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
196	1CO	2	4	lewv	figs-ellipsis	ὁ λόγος μου καὶ τὸ κήρυγμά μου, οὐκ ἐν πειθοῖς σοφίας λόγοις	1		Here, Paul does not use the verb **were** in his sentence. In English, this word is essential, so it has been included in the ULT. If you can translate this sentence without **were**, you could do so here. Otherwise, you could retain **were** as it appears in the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
197	1CO	2	4	g5my	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ λόγος μου καὶ τὸ κήρυγμά μου, οὐκ	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **word** and **proclamation** with verbs. Alternate translation: “I spoke and proclaimed a message not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
198	1CO	2	4	m23e	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πειθοῖς σοφίας λόγοις	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **words** with a verb such as “speak” and the idea behind the abstract noun **wisdom** with an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “based on speaking persuasively and wisely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
199	1CO	2	4	hl7e	figs-possession	σοφίας λόγοις	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to identify the **words** as containing **wisdom**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating **wisdom** with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “wise words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
200	1CO	2	4	chtx	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀποδείξει Πνεύματος καὶ δυνάμεως;	1		Here, Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If the sentence would be misunderstood without these words, you could add them here, supplying the idea from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “but my word and my proclamation were with a demonstration of the Spirit and of power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
201	1CO	2	4	kgnb	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀποδείξει Πνεύματος καὶ δυνάμεως	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **demonstration** and **power** with verbs. Alternate translation: “based on demonstrating the Spirit and how he works powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
202	1CO	2	4	qrfj	figs-possession	ἀποδείξει Πνεύματος καὶ δυνάμεως	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **demonstration** that: (1) comes from **the Spirit** and **power**. Alternate translation: “a demonstration by the Spirit and by power” (2) proves that the **Spirit** and **power** are present. Alternate translation: “a demonstration of the presence of the Spirit and of power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
203	1CO	2	4	s83h	translate-unknown	ἀποδείξει	1		The word translated **demonstration** refers to proving or showing that something is true. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “a validation” or “a confirmation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
204	1CO	2	4	s6h6	figs-hendiadys	Πνεύματος καὶ δυνάμεως	1		This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **Spirit** tells who is acting in **power**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “of the Spirit’s power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
205	1CO	2	5	av3t	figs-idiom	ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν, μὴ ᾖ ἐν σοφίᾳ ἀνθρώπων, ἀλλ’ ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ	1		Here, the phrase translated **faith … in** refers to believing something (**faith**) based on (**in**) something else. It does not refer, as it does in many other places, to believing in or trusting in something. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use translate **in** with a word or phrase that indicates the basis of the **faith**. Alternate translation: “your faith might not be based on the wisdom of men but based on the power of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
206	1CO	2	5	ovoj	figs-activepassive	ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν, μὴ ᾖ	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form by translating **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Alternate translation: “you might believe not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
207	1CO	2	5	rkoy	figs-possession	σοφίᾳ ἀνθρώπων	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe what **men** think is **wisdom**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating **men** with an adjective such as “human.” Alternate translation: “in human wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
208	1CO	2	5	cdw7	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1		Although the word translated **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)<br>
209	1CO	2	5	b29d	figs-possession	δυνάμει Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **power** that **God** has and shows. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating **power** as a verb or adverb with **God** as the subject. Alternate translation: “God working powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
210	1CO	2	6	azm7	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Now we do speak	Here, the word translated **Now** introduces a contrast with what Paul has said in [2:4–5](../02/4–5.md). In those verses, he said that he did not speak with **wisdom**. In this verse, however, he clarifies that he does **speak** with a kind of **wisdom**. If **Now** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “In spite of this,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
211	1CO	2	6	uena	figs-exclusive	λαλοῦμεν	1		Here, **we** refers to Paul and others like him who preach the Gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
212	1CO	2	6	uka3	figs-abstractnouns	σοφίαν	-1	speak wisdom	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **wisdom** by using an adverb such as “wisely” or an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “wisely … the wise speech” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
213	1CO	2	6	eq1q	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς τελείοις	1	the mature	Paul is using the adjective **mature** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate **mature** with a noun phrase or a relative clause. Alternate translation: “those who are mature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
214	1CO	2	6	tm2e	figs-possession	σοφίαν δὲ, οὐ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου, οὐδὲ τῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **wisdom** that fits with the standards and values of **this age** and that **rulers of this age** value. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “but not wisdom that fits with this age nor wisdom that the rulers of this age value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
215	1CO	2	6	xn85	figs-ellipsis	σοφίαν δὲ, οὐ	1		Here, Paul omits some words that may be needed in your language to make this a complete thought. If so, you could supply words from early in the verse. Alternate translation: “but we do not speak wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
216	1CO	2	6	xydl	figs-possession	τῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **rulers** who are in power during **this age**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using language about the time in which the rulers have power or the place in which they have power. Alternate translation: “of the rulers who have power now” or “of the rulers who control this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
217	1CO	2	6	endk	translate-unknown	τῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		The **rulers of this age** could refer to: (1) humans who have power. Alternate translation: “of the people who rule this age” (2) spiritual beings that have power. Alternate translation: “of the spiritual powers that rule this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
218	1CO	2	6	tbnh	translate-unknown	τῶν καταργουμένων	1		Paul has already used the word translated **passing away** in [1:28](../01/28.md), where it is translated **bring to nothing**. Here, the word means that the **rulers** are becoming ineffective, useless, or irrelevant, which means that they will no longer have power. If possible, translate this word like you did in [1:28](../01/28.md). Alternate translation: “who are becoming ineffective” or “who are losing their power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
219	1CO	2	7	l064	figs-exclusive	λαλοῦμεν…ἡμῶν	1		Here, the word **we** refers to Paul and anyone who preaches the Gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. However, the word **our** does include the Corinthians along with Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
220	1CO	2	7	bsme	figs-possession	Θεοῦ σοφίαν	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **wisdom** that **God** would consider to be true **wisdom**. This also means that the **wisdom** comes from **God**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that the **wisdom** comes from **God**. Alternate translation: “the wisdom from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
221	1CO	2	7	wy8u	figs-abstractnouns	σοφίαν	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun wisdom by using an adverb such as “wisely” or an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise message” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)
222	1CO	2	7	xbye	figs-explicitinfo	ἐν μυστηρίῳ τὴν ἀποκεκρυμμένην	1		Here, Paul uses both **has been hidden** and **in a mystery**. Both of these phrases refer to something that is secret. If using both of these phrases is redundant and would be misunderstood in your language, you could use only one. Alternate translation: “that has been hidden” or “that is a mystery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
223	1CO	2	7	fd3s	figs-activepassive	τὴν ἀποκεκρυμμένην	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “that God has hidden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
224	1CO	2	7	ctb4	writing-pronouns	ἣν	1		The word translated **that** refers to **the wisdom**, not **a mystery**. If what **that** refers to would be misunderstood in your language, you could repeat **wisdom** here. Alternate translation: “, the wisdom that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
225	1CO	2	7	k2ct	figs-idiom	πρὸ τῶν αἰώνων	1	before the ages	Paul uses the phrase translated **before the ages** to say that God **predestined** before he made anything. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “before the beginning of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
226	1CO	2	7	q2z9	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς δόξαν ἡμῶν	1	for our glory	Here, the phrase translated **for our glory** introduces the purpose for which **God predestined** the **wisdom**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “so that we might have glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
227	1CO	2	8	bw5i	writing-pronouns	ἣν	1		Just as in [2:7](../02/07.md), the word translated **which** refers to “the wisdom,” not to “a mystery.” If what **which** refers to would be misunderstood in your language, you could repeat “wisdom” here. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns)
228	1CO	2	8	imbk	figs-possession	τῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		Just as in [2:6](../02/06.md), Paul uses the possessive form to describe **rulers** who are in power during **this age**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using language about the time in which **the rulers** have power or the place in which they have power. Alternate translation: “of the rulers who have power now” or “of the rulers who control this world” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession)
229	1CO	2	8	ur15	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		The word translated **for** introduces Paul’s proof that **the rulers** did not understand. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea using a word that customarily introduces proof or evidence. Alternate translation: “which is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
230	1CO	2	8	ji1o	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ…ἔγνωσαν, οὐκ ἂν τὸν Κύριον τῆς δόξης ἐσταύρωσαν;	1		Here, Paul uses **if** to introduce a scenario that he knows is not true. He wants to point out that the **rulers** were the ones who **crucified** Jesus, and this proves that they did not understand God’s wisdom. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by reversing the two clauses and making **they understood it** negative and **they would not have crucified the Lord of glory** positive. Alternate translation: “they crucified the Lord glory, which means that they did not understand it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
231	1CO	2	8	zc89	figs-possession	τὸν Κύριον τῆς δόξης	1	the Lord of glory	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the Lord** who has **glory**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating **glory** with an adjective or a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the Lord who has glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
232	1CO	2	9	fu1y	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Things that no eye … arisen, the things … who love him	The word translated **But** introduces a contrast with the hypothetical statement in [2:8](../02/08.md) about how the rulers would not have crucified the Lord if they had understood God’s wisdom. The **But** reminds the reader that this hypothetical statement is not true, and Paul wishes to introduce further statements about how people do not understand God’s wisdom. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave **But** untranslated or use a word or phrase that would signal that Paul is now longer speaking hypothetically. Alternate translation: “But no,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
233	1CO	2	9	wuar	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ καθὼς γέγραπται	1		Here, Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary in your language to form a complete thought. If necessary, you can supply a summary from [2:8](../02/08.md) of what the rulers did not understand and how they acted. Alternate translation: “But the rulers did not understand, just as it is written” or “But the rulers did do these things, just as it is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
234	1CO	2	9	qcb2	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		In Paul’s culture,** just as it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book written by Isaiah the prophet. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament” or “according to Isaiah the prophet” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations)
235	1CO	2	9	pt3m	figs-infostructure	ἃ ὀφθαλμὸς οὐκ εἶδεν, καὶ οὖς οὐκ ἤκουσεν, καὶ ἐπὶ καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἀνέβη, ἃ ἡτοίμασεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς ἀγαπῶσιν αὐτόν	1		In this quotation, **What eye has not seen, and ear has not heard, and has not arisen in the heart of man** are the **things God has prepared**. If hearing **What eye has not seen, and ear has not heard, and has not arisen in the heart of man** before **God has prepared** would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse the order. Alternate translation: “God has prepared for those who love him what eye has not seen, and ear has not heard, and has not arisen in the heart of man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
236	1CO	2	9	j9ib	figs-synecdoche	ἃ ὀφθαλμὸς οὐκ εἶδεν, καὶ οὖς οὐκ ἤκουσεν, καὶ ἐπὶ καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἀνέβη	1	Things that no eye has seen, no ear has heard, no mind has imagined	Here, the words **eye**, **ear**, and **heart** refer to the parts of the person that see, hear, and think. In each case, the word means that the whole person sees, hears, and thinks. If this way of speaking would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that refers to a person as a whole instead of just a part of that person. Alternate translation: “What a person has not seen, and a person has not heard, and has not arisen when a person thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
237	1CO	2	9	xe03	figs-idiom	ἐπὶ καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἀνέβη	1		The phrase **heart of man** refers to the place where humans think. If something “arises” there, that means that a human has thought about that thing. If the meaning of **arisen in the heart of man** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “man has not thought about” or “man has not imagined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
238	1CO	2	9	pigi	figs-possession	καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **heart** that belongs to a **man**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate **man** with an adjective such as “human.” Alternate translation: “the human heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
239	1CO	2	9	yw0a	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπου	1		Although the word translated **man** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
240	1CO	2	9	us5y	grammar-collectivenouns	ἀνθρώπου	1		Here, even though **man** is written in singular form, it refers to anyone who would be considered a **man**, that is, any human. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you can make **man** plural. Alternate translation: “of men” or “of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
241	1CO	2	10	z472	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		The word translated **For** introduces an explanation of the last line of the quote from [2:9](../02/09.md): “these things God has prepared for those who love him.” Paul wants to explain that these are the things that **God has revealed** to those who believe. If the meaning of **For** would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave the word untranslated or use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
242	1CO	2	10	hp6w	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	2		Here, the word translated **For** introduces an explanation for why God’s revelation is made **to us through the Spirit**. It is because the **Spirit searches everything** and knows everything that is **revealed**. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces this kind of explanation. Alternate translation: “He works through the Spirit because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
243	1CO	2	10	zccl	translate-unknown	ἐραυνᾷ	1		Here, the word translated **searches** refers to how someone can explore or know about something else. If the meaning of **searches** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use another word for “exploring” or “knowing.” Alternate translation: “comprehends” or “knows about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
244	1CO	2	10	bhyv	translate-unknown	τὰ βάθη τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		The phrase **deep things of God** refers to things about God that are hard to understand or things about God that no one can fully comprehend. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression or state the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “secrets about God” or “things about God that no one knows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
245	1CO	2	11	h4p8	figs-rquestion	τίς γὰρ οἶδεν ἀνθρώπων τὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, εἰ μὴ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ?	1	For who knows a person’s thoughts except the spirit of the person in him?	Here, Paul uses question because he thinks that everyone will agree with him, for this information is common knowledge in his culture. He does not use a question because he is not sure about the answer. If using a question here would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a form that presents information that everyone knows and agrees with. Alternate translation: “For it is a well-known fact that no one among men knows the things of a man except the spirit of the man that {is} within him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
246	1CO	2	11	gw3u	grammar-connect-exceptions	τίς γὰρ οἶδεν ἀνθρώπων τὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, εἰ μὴ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ? οὕτως καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐδεὶς ἔγνωκεν, εἰ μὴ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ.	1	no one knows the deep things of God except the Spirit of God	In both parts of this verse, Paul makes a negative claim and then gives an exception to that claim. If it would appear in your language that Paul is contradicting himself, you could use a different structure that also singles out one possibility and negates all other possibilities. Alternate translation: “For the spirit of the man that {is} within him is the only one among men that knows the things of a man, right? So also, the Spirit of God is the only one that knows the things of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
247	1CO	2	11	li8e	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων…ἀνθρώπου…τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ	1		Although the words translated **men**, **man**, and **him** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “among people … of a person … of the person that {is} within that person” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
248	1CO	2	11	lmzi	figs-genericnoun	ἀνθρώπου…τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ	1		Paul uses the word **man** to speak of people in general, not one specific person. If the meaning of **man** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a form that indicates people in general in your language. Alternate translation: “of a certain man … of that certain man that {is} within him” or “of men … of men that {is} within them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
249	1CO	2	11	wfr2	figs-idiom	τίς…ἀνθρώπων	1		The phrase **who among men** is a way of asking about people or things that belong to a specific category. Paul means to ask if there are any **men** who can know **the things of a man**. He uses this phrase because God also **knows the things of a man**, so he must limit his question to only **men**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase that asks about people or things, but only those that belong in a specific category. Alternate translation: “which man” or “out of all men, who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
250	1CO	2	11	mi27	figs-idiom	τὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου…τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the phrases **the things of a man** and **the things of God** to refer to everything that makes up the person, including personality, thoughts, actions, desires, possessions, and many more similar categories. Paul is intentionally general and does not narrow down which of these categories he has in mind. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that refers to all the aspects of a person that makes that person unique. Alternate translation: “all the details about a man … all the details about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
251	1CO	2	11	i47d	translate-unknown	τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ	1	spirit of the person	The word translated **spirit** is the same word that Paul uses for the Holy **Spirit**. It refers to the interior life of a person, to the part of them that people cannot see, including their thoughts and desires. If possible, use the same word here that you will use later in the verse for the **Spirit**, since Paul is drawing an analogy between the human **spirit** and God’s **Spirit**. If you cannot use the word for God’s **Spirit** to describe a human being, you could: (1) refer simply to a human without specifying which part of the human **knows**. Alternate translation: “the man himself” (2) use an expression that refers to the interior life of a human. Alternate translation: “the consciousness of the man that {is} within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
252	1CO	2	11	to3t	figs-idiom	τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ	1		In this culture, people would speak of the non-physical part of human beings as if it were inside the physical part of human beings. Here, Paul speaks in this way when he says that the **spirit of the man** is **within him**. By using **within him**, Paul is identifying the **spirit** as the one that belongs to **the man**. It is not some other man’s **spirit**. If the meaning of **within him** would be misunderstood in your language, you could: (1) use a word or phrase that identifies that the **spirit** belongs to **the man** only. Alternate translation: “that man’s own spirit” (2) express the idea by using a phrase that describes where a human being’s non-physical part would be in your culture. Alternate translation: “the spirit of the man that permeates him” or “the spirit of the man that suffuses him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
253	1CO	2	12	zbv8	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	General Information:	Here, the word translated **But** introduces the next part of Paul’s argument. If the meaning of **But** would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave it untranslated or use a word or phrase that signifies that the argument is moving on. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
254	1CO	2	12	evts	figs-infostructure	ἡμεῖς…οὐ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κόσμου ἐλάβομεν, ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If stating the negative before the positive would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse the order of the **not** statement and the **but** statement. Alternate translation: “we received the Spirit who {is} from God, not the spirit of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
255	1CO	2	12	emse	translate-unknown	τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κόσμου	1		The phrase **spirit of the world** could refer to: (1) a **spirit** that does not actually exist. In other words, Paul is saying that the Spirit they received did not come from the **world** but rather came from **God**. Alternate translation: “a spirit that comes from the world” (2) human ways of thinking and understanding, which could be called a **spirit**. In other words, Paul is saying that they did not receive human ways of thinking but rather ways of thinking that God’s Spirit brings. Alternate translation: “human ways of thinking” ((See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
256	1CO	2	12	ev7j	figs-possession	τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κόσμου	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **spirit** that comes from or has its source in **the world**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that **the world** is the source or origin of this **spirit**. Alternate translation: “the spirit from the world” or “the spirit that comes from the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
257	1CO	2	12	vw4v	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα	1		Here, Paul omits some words that may be needed in your language to make a complete thought. If this shortened form would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply some words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but we received the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
258	1CO	2	12	w1qd	figs-activepassive	τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could make God the subject of the **who** statement. Alternate translation: “the Spirit whom God sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
259	1CO	2	12	n1c7	figs-activepassive	τὰ ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ χαρισθέντα ἡμῖν	1	freely given to us by God	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that God has freely given to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
260	1CO	2	13	nan2	figs-exclusive	λαλοῦμεν	1		Here, the word **we** refers to Paul and others who proclaim the Gospel with him. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive)
261	1CO	2	13	u797	figs-infostructure	οὐκ ἐν διδακτοῖς ἀνθρωπίνης σοφίας λόγοις, ἀλλ’ ἐν διδακτοῖς Πνεύματος	1	The Spirit interprets spiritual words with spiritual wisdom	If putting the negative statement before the positive statement would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse them, putting **words** with the positive statement. Alternate translation: “in words taught by the Spirit, not in those taught by human wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
262	1CO	2	13	yg45	figs-activepassive	διδακτοῖς ἀνθρωπίνης σοφίας λόγοις	1	The Spirit interprets spiritual words with spiritual wisdom	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “words that human wisdom teaches” or “words that humans teach as wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
263	1CO	2	13	ywbw	figs-activepassive	διδακτοῖς Πνεύματος	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “those that the Spirit teaches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
264	1CO	2	13	gueq	translate-unknown	πνευματικοῖς πνευματικὰ συνκρίνοντες	1		Here, the phrase **combining spiritual things with spiritual words** could mean: (1) that Paul and those with him interpret **spiritual things** and ideas with **spiritual words**. Alternate translation: “interpreting spiritual things with spiritual words” (2) that Paul and those with him explain **spiritual things** to **spiritual** people. Alternate translation: “explaining spiritual things to spiritual people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
265	1CO	2	13	kinz	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	συνκρίνοντες	1		Here, the word translated **combining** introduces an action that takes place at the same time as when **we speak**. The idea is that **combining spiritual things with spiritual words** is the way that **we speak these things**. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by including a word or phrase that indicates that **combining** is the way in which **we speak**. Alternate translation: “by means of combining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
266	1CO	2	13	mnpq	translate-unknown	συνκρίνοντες	1		The word translated **combining** could mean: (1) interpreting or explaining an idea. Alternate translation: “interpreting” (2) putting two things together, either to compare or blend them together. Alternate translation: “comparing” or “compounding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
267	1CO	2	14	i8jw	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		The word translated **But** introduces a new part of Paul’s argument, and it also introduces a contrast with how Paul and those with him speak by the power of the Spirit in [2:13](../02/13.md). Unlike Paul and those with him, the **natural person** does not have the Spirit and does not use spiritual words. If the meaning of **But** would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave it untranslated or use a word that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
268	1CO	2	14	hq3u	translate-unknown	ψυχικὸς…ἄνθρωπος	1	unspiritual person	The phrase **the natural person** describes a person who does not have God’s Spirit. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that describes someone who has not received God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “the person without the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
269	1CO	2	14	cve2	figs-genericnoun	ψυχικὸς…ἄνθρωπος, οὐ δέχεται…αὐτῷ…οὐ δύναται	1	General Information:	Paul uses the words **person**, **him**, and **he** to speak of people in general, not one specific man. If the meaning of these words would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a form that indicates people in general in your language. Alternate translation: “any natural person does not receive … to him or her … he or she is not able” or “natural people do not receive … to them … they are not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
270	1CO	2	14	vvju	figs-gendernotations	αὐτῷ…οὐ δύναται	1		Here, the words translated **him** and **he** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of **he** and **him** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “to that person … that person is not able” or “to him or her … he or she is not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
271	1CO	2	14	fye5	figs-activepassive	μωρία…αὐτῷ ἐστίν	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could reverse the structure and make **him** the subject of a verb such as “think” or “consider.” Alternate translation: “for he thinks that they are foolishness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
272	1CO	2	14	gwe3	figs-activepassive	πνευματικῶς ἀνακρίνεται	1	because they are spiritually discerned	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form with vague or non-specific subject. Alternate translation: “people can only discern them spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
273	1CO	2	14	vznr		πνευματικῶς ἀνακρίνεται	1		Alternate translation: “they are discerned by the power of the Spirit” or “they are discerned by people who are indwelt by the Spirit”
274	1CO	2	15	w4q7	translate-unknown	ὁ…πνευματικὸς	1	the one who is spiritual	Here, Paul uses **the spiritual one** as the opposite of “the natural person” in [2:14](../02/14.md). The phrase **the spiritual one** describes a person who does have God’s Spirit. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that describes someone who has received God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “the person with the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
275	1CO	2	15	gcv7	figs-genericnoun	ὁ…πνευματικὸς ἀνακρίνει…αὐτὸς…ἀνακρίνεται	1		Paul uses the words **spiritual one** and **he himself** to speak of people in general, not one specific man. If the meaning of these words would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a form that indicates people in general. Alternate translation: “any spiritual person discerns … he himself or she herself” or “spiritual people discern … they themselves are discerned” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun)
276	1CO	2	15	ap89	figs-hyperbole	τὰ πάντα	1		Here, Paul uses phrase translated **all things** as an exaggeration to emphasize that the **spiritual one** can discern God’s gifts and the message of the Gospel. He does not mean that every **spiritual** person is able to discern everything there is to know. If this exaggeration would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “many things,” and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “many things indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
277	1CO	2	15	ji5n	figs-activepassive	αὐτὸς…ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς ἀνακρίνεται	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “no one discerns him himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
278	1CO	2	15	ypl6	figs-gendernotations	αὐτὸς…ἀνακρίνεται	1		Here, the words translated **he himself** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of **he himself** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “that person is discerned” or “he himself or she herself is discerned” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
279	1CO	2	15	zg4b	figs-explicit	αὐτὸς…ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς ἀνακρίνεται	1		Here, Paul wishes to say that it is impossible for someone without the Spirit to properly understand or make judgments about the person who does have the Spirit. If this implication would be missed by your readers, you could make it more explicit that Paul speaking about the possibility of someone without the Spirit “discerning” someone with the Spirit. Alternate translation: “he himself cannot be discerned by anyone who is not spiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
280	1CO	2	16	ye98	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word translated **For** introduces proof from Scripture to support what Paul has said about the “natural person” and the “spiritual” person in [2:14–15](../02/14–15.md). If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is introducing proof. Alternate translation: “You can tell that these things are true because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
281	1CO	2	16	tj79	writing-quotations	γὰρ	1		The word translated **For** is the only word that Paul has used to introduce this quotation from the Old Testament, in this case, from the book written by Isaiah the prophet. If introducing a quotation in this way would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For, as it can be read in the Old Testament,” or “For, according to Isaiah the prophet,” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
282	1CO	2	16	m4pu	figs-rquestion	τίς…ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ὃς συμβιβάσει αὐτόν?	1	For who can know the mind of the Lord, that he can instruct him?	Here, the passage that Paul quotes from the book of Isaiah uses a question to indicate that no human **has known the mind of the Lord**, and no human **will instruct him**. The question is not asking for information. Instead, it assumes that the answer is “no one,” and the author uses a question to make a negative claim that is stronger than a simple statement. If the question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “no one has known the mind of the Lord—no one will instruct him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
283	1CO	2	16	wacc	figs-possession	νοῦν Κυρίου	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **mind** that the **Lord** has or uses. If it would be misunderstood that the **Lord** is one who is thinking with **the mind**, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “the thoughts that the Lord thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
284	1CO	2	16	r18k	figs-metaphor	νοῦν Χριστοῦ ἔχομεν	1		Here, Paul speaks as if **we** are people who possess **the mind of Christ**. Paul means that **we** are able to understand what Christ thinks and share the same ways of thinking with him. He does not mean that we have taken Christ’s **mind** from him or that we no longer have our own **mind**. If “having someone else’s mind” would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or with a verb such as “share.” Alternate translation: “think the same thoughts as Christ does” or “share in the mind of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
285	1CO	2	16	pr9b	figs-possession	νοῦν Χριστοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **mind** that **Christ** has or uses. If it would be misunderstood that **Christ** is one who is thinking with **the mind**, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “the thoughts that Christ thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
286	1CO	3	intro	g6ku			0		# 1 Corinthians 3 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)<br> * Paul identifies the divisions (3:1–5)<br> * Farming metaphor (3:6–9a)<br> * Building metaphor (3:9b–15<br> * Temple metaphor (3:16–17)<br> * Wisdom and folly (3:18–20)<br> * All things are yours (3:21–23)<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verses 19 and 20. Verse 19 quotes from Job 5:13, and verse 20 quotes from Psalm 94:11.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Fleshly people<br><br>In [3:1–4](../03/01–04.md), Paul calls the Corinthian believers “fleshly.” In [3:3](../03/03.md), he defines “fleshly” as “walking according to men.” The word “fleshly” thus refers to people who think and behave from a merely human point of view, without thinking and behaving from God’s perspective. The opposite of “fleshly” is “spiritual,” which refers to those who think and behave by the power of the Spirit (see [3:1](../0/01.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])<br><br>### Fire and judgment<br><br>In Paul’s culture, fire was commonly associated with the day when God would come to judge everyone. Paul uses this association when he makes use of the metaphor of a building. When a building catches on fire, it shows how well it was build. Similarly, when the fire of God’s judgment comes, it will show who has taught the gospel correctly. Fire fits within the metaphor of a building, but it is not just a part of that metaphor. If it is possible, retain the language of fire for God’s judgment. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judgmentday]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]])<br><br>### Wisdom and Foolishness<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both wisdom and foolishness. Just as in chapters one and two, these words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. Continue to use the words you chose in chapters one and two. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fool]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Infants and food metaphor<br><br>In [3:1–2](../03/01–02.md), Paul speaks as if the Corinthians are infants who were, and still are, unable to eat any solid food but can only drink milk. By speaking about them as if they were infants, Paul wishes to tell the Corinthians that they are spiritually immature. They are immature enough that they can only drink milk. Paul uses “milk” to refer to the very basic teachings about Christ, while he uses “solid food” to refer to the more advanced teachings. In translating this metaphor, use words that identify what very small children can eat (milk) and what they cannot eat (solid food). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])<br><br>### Farming metaphor<br><br>In [3:6–9a](../03/06–09.md), Paul speaks as if he and Apollos were farmers. Paul first proclaimed the gospel to the Corinthians, so he is like a farmer who plants seeds. Apollos taught the Corinthians more about the gospel, so he is like a farmer who waters the plants when they start to grow. However, God is the one who makes seeds grow into plants and the one who enables believers to accept and learn more about the gospel. With this metaphor, Paul wishes to emphasize that he and Apollos are equal in that they both teach about the gospel. However, neither one of them is significant in comparison to God, who is the one who actually enables people to accept and believe in the gospel. If possible, preserve the farming metaphor, even if you need to adjust some of the details. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])<br><br>### Building metaphor<br><br>In [3:9b–15](../03/09–15.md), Paul speaks of the Corinthians as if they were a house. Paul is the one who laid the house's foundation, because he was the one who first proclaimed the gospel to them. Other people, whom Paul does not name, build on the foundation. They are the ones who are teaching the Corinthians more, whether what they teach is correct or not. Paul then says that the building will catch on fire, and what each of these builders used to construct the house will become clear. If they built with durable materials, they will be rewarded, but if they built with materials that burn, they will suffer loss, and the builders themselves will barely escape from the fire. In speaking this way, Paul is warning those who teach more about the gospel that God himself will judge whether what they teach is correct or not. If it is incorrect, those teachers will lose everything and barely be saved themselves. If it is correct, God will honor and reward those teachers. If possible, preserve the building metaphor, even if you need to adjust some of the details. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])<br><br>### Temple metaphor<br><br>In [3:16–17](../03/16–17.md), Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were God’s temple. By speaking this way, he identifies the Corinthian believers as a place where God is specially present. Paul then notes that anyone who does anything to harm God’s temple will be punished by God. Since the Corinthians are like God’s temple, God will punish anyone who does anything to harm them, including if anyone tries to divide them up into different groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul asks many questions in this chapter ([3:3–5](../03/03–05.md); [16](../03/16.md)). He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Christ is God’s<br><br>In [3:23](../03/23.md), Paul says that “Christ is God’s.” He does not mean that Christ is a person who belongs to God, but is not God. Rather, he means that Christ is part of who God is. Christ belongs to the being of God. In your translation, you should to try to preserve this meaning. However, if possible, do not make your translation into a statement about the divinity of Christ, since that is not the main point that Paul is trying to make.
287	1CO	3	1	zfdg	grammar-connect-words-phrases	κἀγώ	1		The word translated **And I** is the same word that appears at the beginning of [2:1](../02/01.md). Just as there, Paul uses **And I** here to introduce how his own experience visiting the Corinthians fits into the general pattern he has outlined at the end of chapter 2. Here, however, his experience with the Corinthians is the opposite of what he would have liked. Therefore, the words **And I** introduce a contrast with what he said in [2:16](../02/16.md) about having the mind of Christ. If the meaning of **And I** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that introduces a specific example or a word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “But I” or “As for me, I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
288	1CO	3	1	r4iw	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although the word translated **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If **brothers** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
289	1CO	3	1	jn0q	figs-infostructure	οὐκ ἠδυνήθην λαλῆσαι ὑμῖν ὡς πνευματικοῖς, ἀλλ’ ὡς σαρκίνοις, ὡς νηπίοις ἐν Χριστῷ.	1		If stating the negative before the positive would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse the order of the **not** statement and the **but** statements. Alternate translation: “had to speak to you as to fleshly, as to infants in Christ, not as to spiritual” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
290	1CO	3	1	jx17	figs-nominaladj	πνευματικοῖς…σαρκίνοις	1	spiritual people	Paul is using the adjectives **spiritual** and **fleshly** as nouns in order to describe groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “to spiritual people … to fleshly people” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj)
291	1CO	3	1	r5w5	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ὡς σαρκίνοις, ὡς νηπίοις	1	fleshly people	Here, Paul leaves out some words that might be required in your language to make a complete thought. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply the needed words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but I spoke to you as to fleshly, I spoke to you as to infants” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
292	1CO	3	1	ja6t	figs-metaphor	νηπίοις ἐν Χριστῷ	1	as to little children in Christ	Here, Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were **infants**. He wants the Corinthians to think about how **infants** are immature, do not have much knowledge, and are unable to understand most things. By calling the Corinthians **infants in Christ**, he means that in their relationship with Jesus, they were immature, had little knowledge, and were unable to understand very much. If calling the Corinthians **infants** would be misunderstood in your language, you could a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “to beginners in Christ” or “to those who could understand very little about their faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
293	1CO	3	1	m588	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1		Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or being united to Christ, explains in what area of their lives they were like **infants**. They acted like **infants** in their relationship with Christ. If the meaning of **in Christ** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by referring to their “faith” in **Christ** or their “relationship” with **Christ**. Alternate translation: “in their faith in Christ” or “in their relationship with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
294	1CO	3	2	vg2v	figs-metaphor	γάλα ὑμᾶς ἐπότισα, οὐ βρῶμα	1	I fed you milk, not solid food	Paul refers to **milk** because it is the food of “infants,” whom Paul already mentioned in [3:1](../03/01.md). The **milk** is the only thing that the “infants” can eat, and Paul thus uses **milk** to refer to the very simplest things that the Corinthians were able to understand about the Gospel. “Infants” do not eat **solid food**, because they are not yet able to properly chew or digest it. So, Paul uses **solid food** to refer to the more complex things about the Gospel that he could not teach the Corinthians because they were “infants,” that is, people who could not understand such complex teachings. If that metaphor about **milk** and **solid food** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I taught you the basics, not the full picture” or “I taught you things that are easy to understand, not things that are hard to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
295	1CO	3	2	fujt	figs-ellipsis	οὐ βρῶμα	1		Here, Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If the sentence would be misunderstood without these words, you could add a phrase such as “to eat.” Alternate translation: “not solid food to eat” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
296	1CO	3	2	d2x5	figs-ellipsis	οὔπω…ἐδύνασθε…οὐδὲ νῦν δύνασθε	1		Here, Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If the sentence would be misunderstood without these words, you could add them here, supplying the idea from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “you were not yet able to eat solid food … even now, you are not able to eat solid food” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
297	1CO	3	2	i3r5	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1		The word translated **Indeed** functions to contrast the time when Paul visited the Corinthians with the time when Paul is writing this letter. He speaks of these two different times to say that the Corinthians could not to eat the **solid food** at either time. If the meaning of **Indeed** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that contrasts two times or a word that introduces additional information. Alternate translation: “But” or “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
298	1CO	3	3	m712	figs-nominaladj	σαρκικοί	-1	still fleshly	Paul is using the adjective **fleshly** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this adjective with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “fleshly people … fleshly people” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj)
299	1CO	3	3	o618	figs-abstractnouns	ὅπου…ἐν ὑμῖν ζῆλος καὶ ἔρις	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **jealousy** and **strife** by using verbs such as “being jealous” and “fighting.” Alternate translation: “where you are jealous and fight with one another” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)
300	1CO	3	3	s1uy	figs-metonymy	ὅπου	1		The word translated **where** often refers to space. However, here Paul uses it to refer to time. Instead of identifying a specific location, it identifies a specific time. If the meaning of **where** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that refers to time. Alternate translation: “when there is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
301	1CO	3	3	k5ll	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ σαρκικοί ἐστε καὶ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖτε?	1	are you not living according to the flesh, and are you not walking by human standards?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information or for agreement or disagreement. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a statement that draws a conclusion from the **jealousy** and the **strife**. Alternate translation: “you are fleshly and walking according to men” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
302	1CO	3	3	oz5v	figs-hendiadys	καὶ	2		Here, Paul uses the word translated **and** to introduce a definition of what **fleshly** means. It means **walking according to men**. If you cannot use **and** to introduce a definition or explanation, you could use another word or phrase that does introduce a definition or explanation. Alternate translation: “, that is, are you not” or “, which means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
303	1CO	3	3	as2u	figs-metaphor	κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖτε	1		Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were **walking**. If **walking** would not be understood as a description of a person’s way of life in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “behaving as men do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
304	1CO	3	3	ljri	figs-idiom	κατὰ ἄνθρωπον	1		Here, Paul speaks of behavior that is **according to men**. By using this phrase, he wishes to identify behaviors that people who think and act in only human ways do. These people do not have God’s Spirit, so they “walk” according to the values and goals of this world. If the phrase **according to men** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that refers to things and behaviors that people who do not believe value. Alternate translation: “according to what mere humans value” or “according to this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
305	1CO	3	3	y8b4	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον	1		Although the word translated **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “humans” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
306	1CO	3	4	cidr	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word translated **For** introduces further evidence for Paul’s argument that the Corinthians in acting in merely humans ways. If that meaning for **For** would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave **For** untranslated or express the idea using a word or phrase that introduces more evidence or examples. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
307	1CO	3	4	g8zt	writing-pronouns	λέγῃ τις…ἕτερος	1		Here, Paul uses the pronouns **one** and **another** to give two examples of some people in the Corinthian church who are sayings these kinds of things. He does not mean that only two people are saying these things. He also does not mean that these are the only things that people in the church are saying. If the form that Paul uses would be misunderstood in your language, you could use words that introduce examples of a larger pattern, and you could add a phrase that indicates that the words **I am of Paul** and **I am of of Apollos** are two examples of the kinds of things that they are saying. Alternate translation: “some people among you say things like … other people among you say things like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
308	1CO	3	4	rmtq	figs-quotations	ἐγὼ…εἰμι Παύλου…ἐγὼ Ἀπολλῶ	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “that he or she is of Paul … that he or she is of Apollos” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations)
309	1CO	3	4	g68p	figs-possession	ἐγὼ…εἰμι Παύλου…ἐγὼ Ἀπολλῶ	1		Just as in [1:12](../01/12.md), Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that people are claiming to be part of a specific leader’s group. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a word such as “belong” or “follow.” Alternate translation: “‘I follow Paul’ … ‘I follow Apollos’” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession)
310	1CO	3	4	zsby	translate-names	Παύλου…Ἀπολλῶ	1		These are the names of two men. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
311	1CO	3	4	s96g	figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἄνθρωποί ἐστε?	1	are you not living as human beings?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information or for agreement or disagreement. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a statement that draws a conclusion from what Paul says the Corinthians are saying. Alternate translation: “you are men” or “this shows that you are men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
312	1CO	3	4	mmlq	figs-explicit	ἄνθρωποί	1		When Paul says that the Corinthians are **men**, he means that they are “only” or “merely” **men**. He is not identifying them as humans. Rather, he means that they are acting and speaking from “merely human” perspective rather than from God’s perspective, a perspective they can share if they have God’s Spirit. If the meaning of **men** would be misunderstood in your language, you could add a word or phrase that clarifies that **men** refers to a “merely human” view of the world. Alternate translation: “merely men” or “speaking from a human perspective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
313	1CO	3	4	te5r	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωποί	1		Although the word translated **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If **men** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “humans” or “men and women” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
314	1CO	3	5	typo	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὖν	1		The word translated **then** introduces a further stage in Paul’s argument. He has argued in [3:3](../03/04.md) that **Paul** and **Apollos** should not be treated as leaders of groups. In this verse, he goes on to explain how he thinks that **Paul** and **Apollos** should be treated, which is as servants of Christ. Thus, the word translated **then** introduces who **Paul** and **Apollos** really are. If how **then** functions would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave it untranslated or use a word that introduces the next step in an argument. Alternate translation: “, therefore,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
315	1CO	3	5	m463	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐστιν Ἀπολλῶς? τί δέ ἐστιν Παῦλος? διάκονοι	1	Who then is Apollos? And who is Paul?	Here, Paul uses these questions to do two things. First, the questions imply that **Apollos** and **Paul** are not very important. Therefore, an implied answer to these questions would be that **Apollos** and **Paul** are “not very much.” Second, Paul uses the questions to introduce his own answer to these questions. After using the questions to imply that he and **Apollos** are not much, he then states that they are **servants**. If using questions in these ways would be misunderstood in your language, you could express them as a statement about the status of **Apollos** and **Paul** as **servants**, and you could use a word such as “only” or “merely” to express the idea that they are not very important. Alternate translation: “Apollos and Paul are merely servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
316	1CO	3	5	i9d0	translate-names	Ἀπολλῶς…Παῦλος	1		These are the names of two men. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
317	1CO	3	5	lq6n	figs-123person	ἐστιν Παῦλος?	1	And who is Paul?	In this verse, **Paul** speaks of himself in the third person. This could sound like he is speaking about a different **Paul** than himself. If this use of **Paul** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that **Paul** is naming himself. Alternate translation: “am I, Paul” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
318	1CO	3	5	qmy2	figs-ellipsis	διάκονοι δι’ ὧν ἐπιστεύσατε	1	Servants through whom you believed	Here, Paul omits several words that may be required in your language to make a complete thought. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could include the words needed to make a complete thought, such as “we are” or “they are.” Alternate translation: “We are servants through whom you believed” or “They are servants through whom you believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
319	1CO	3	5	edod	figs-explicit	διάκονοι δι’ ὧν ἐπιστεύσατε	1		When **Paul** says that he and **Apollos** are those **through whom** the Corinthians **believed**, he is implying that the Corinthians believed in someone other than **Paul** and **Apollos**. That is, they believed in Christ. If this implication about **whom** the Corinthians **believed** in would be misunderstood in your language, you could make it explicit by including what the Corinthians **believed** in, which is “Christ” and not **Apollos** or **Paul**. Alternate translation: “Servants through whom you believed in Christ” or “Servants through whom you believed in Christ, not in us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
320	1CO	3	5	h2jv	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ…ὡς	1		Here, the words translated **even as** introduce the way in which **Apollos** and **Paul** act as **servants**. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that could introduce the ways in which **Apollos** and **Paul** asre servants. Alternate translation: “who do what” or “serving just as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
321	1CO	3	5	f6wm	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ἑκάστῳ ὡς ὁ Κύριος ἔδωκεν	1	Servants through whom you believed, to each of whom the Lord gave tasks	Here, Paul omits what **the Lord gave** because it would be clear that he means that **the Lord gave** a specific job or task **to each one** of them. If **the Lord gave to each one** would be misunderstood in your language, you could add a word or phrase that indicates that **the Lord gave** a specific job or task. Alternate translation: “even as the Lord gave a task to teach one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
322	1CO	3	5	e8tb	writing-pronouns	ἑκάστῳ	1		The word translated **to each one** directly refers back to **Apollos** and **Paul**. However, it also probably refers to everyone who serves the Lord. If you can refer to multiple individuals considered separately in your language, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “to each and every one who serves him” or “per person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
323	1CO	3	6	iah7	figs-exmetaphor	ἐγὼ ἐφύτευσα, Ἀπολλῶς ἐπότισεν, ἀλλὰ ὁ Θεὸς ηὔξανεν.	1	I planted	Paul speaks about the roles that God gave to him and to **Apollos** as if they were farmers who **planted** and **watered** their crops. The one who “plants” is the person who begins the farming process, just like Paul first introduced the Corinthians to the gospel. The one who “waters” is the person who continues the farming process by making sure the plants receive what they need to grow, just like **Apollos** continued to proclaim the gospel to the Corinthians. It is a well-known fact in Paul’s culture that plants grow because God enables them to do so, just like God enabled to the Corinthians to receive the gospel and learn more about God. If the way Paul uses farming language to describe how the Corinthians received the Gospel would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I invested the money, Apollos managed the portfolio, but God gave the return on investment” or “I introduced you to the gospel, Apollos taught you more about the gospel, but God enabled you to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
324	1CO	3	6	ic6x	figs-ellipsis	ἐγὼ ἐφύτευσα, Ἀπολλῶς ἐπότισεν, ἀλλὰ ὁ Θεὸς ηὔξανεν.	1		Paul never states what it is that he **planted**, that **Apollos watered**, and that **God caused to grow**. He does not state what it is because he wishes to use a general statement about farming practices. If you need to state what is **planted** and **watered**, you could include a general word or words such as “seed,” “plant,” or “crop.” Alternate translation: “I planted the seeds, Apollos watered the plants, but God caused the them to grow” or “I planted the crop, Apollos watered it, but God caused it to grow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
325	1CO	3	6	gyi5	translate-names	Ἀπολλῶς	1	Apollos watered	This is the name of a man. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
326	1CO	3	6	iq9n	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἐφύτευσα, Ἀπολλῶς ἐπότισεν, ἀλλὰ ὁ Θεὸς	1	but God gave the growth	Here, Paul uses **but** to contrast himself and **Apollos** with **God**. The point is that what he did and what **Apollos** did are at the same level of importance, but God’s work is the most important. Another way to understand this contrast is to notice that Paul and **Apollos** assist in the process of plants growing, but **God** is the only one who actually makes them grow. Again, the main point is that Paul and **Apollos** are simply “servants” of God ([3:5](../03/05.md)) in a process that God oversees. If **but** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that puts Paul and **Apollos** together in contrast with **God**. Alternate translation: “planted, and Apollos watered. However, it was God who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
327	1CO	3	7	g78n	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1		Paul uses the word translated **so then** to introduce a conclusion or inference from what he said about watering, planting, and growth in [3:6](../03/06.md). Here, he wishes to explain that the difference between **God** who **causes the growth** and anyone who **plants** or **waters** is about their importance in the process. It is **God** who is important, because he is the only one who **causes the growth**, just as he stated in [3:6](../03/06.md). If that meaning of **so then** would be misunderstood in your language, you could a comparable word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or an inference. Alternate translation: “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
328	1CO	3	7	c4wy	figs-exmetaphor	οὔτε ὁ φυτεύων ἐστίν τι, οὔτε ὁ ποτίζων, ἀλλ’ ὁ αὐξάνων, Θεός.	1		Paul now speaks in general about the tasks that God has given to those who proclaim the gospel. He continues to speak as if those who proclaim the gospel were farmers who planted and watered their crops. The **one who plants** is the person who begins the farming process, just like the person who first proclaims the gospel. The **one who waters** is the person who continues the farming process by making sure the plants receive what they need to grow, just like the person who continues to teach the gospel. It is a well-known fact in Paul’s culture that plants grow because God enables them to do so, just like God enables those who believe to receive the gospel and learn more about God. If the way Paul uses farming language to describe how people proclaim the gospel and how God enables others to receive it would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “neither the one who invests the money nor the one who manages the portfolio is anything, but God {is} the one who gives the return on investment” or “neither the person who introduces believers to the gospel nor the person who teaches believers more about the gospel is anything, but God {is} the one who enables believers to have faith” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor)
329	1CO	3	7	dl3z	figs-genericnoun	ὁ φυτεύων…ὁ ποτίζων	1	neither he who plants is anything … but God is the one who causes the growth	When Paul speaks of **the one who plants**, he has himself in mind. When he speaks of **the one who waters**, he has Apollos in mind. This is clear from what he says in the last verse ([3:6](../03/06.md)). However, he is now speaking in more general terms. He does not mean just **one** person who does “planting” and one person who does “watering.” Rather, he wishes to refer to anyone who does either of these tasks. If the phrase **the one who** would not be understood to mean that in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person who does the task. Alternate translation: “any person who plants … any person who waters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
330	1CO	3	7	uutk	figs-ellipsis	ὁ φυτεύων…ὁ ποτίζων	1		Paul never states what it is that someone **plants** and that someone else **waters**. He does not state what it is because he wishes to use a general statement about farming practices. If you need to state what is planted and watered, you could include a general word or words such as “seed,” “plant,” or “crop.” Alternate translation: “the one who plants the seeds … the one who waters the plants” or “the one who plants the crop … the one who waters it” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
331	1CO	3	7	jrb1	figs-hyperbole	τι	1		Here, the word translated **anything** is an exaggeration that emphasizes how unimportant the people who plant and water are. It is as if they are nothing, as if they do not exist. Paul does not mean that they do not exist. Instead, he uses this exaggeration to show how unimportant the people who plant and water are compared to God. If the meaning of **anything** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates “importance.” Alternate translation: “important” or “significant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
332	1CO	3	7	hmk6	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ὁ αὐξάνων, Θεός.	1		Here, Paul does not directly finish the contrast between the people who plant and water and **God**. What he means is that **God** is the one who is important because he **causes the growth**. If the meaning of this contrast would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply the words that Paul omits, including a word or phrase about how God is “important.” Alternate translation: “but God, who is the one who causes the growth, is the important one” or “but God is the significant one because he causes the growth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
333	1CO	3	7	c68g	figs-abstractnouns	αὐξάνων	1	but God is the one who causes the growth	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **growth** with a verb such as “grow.” Alternate translation: “who makes it grow” or “who causes things to grow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
334	1CO	3	8	dmfs	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, the word translated **Now** introduces the next step in Paul’s argument. If the meaning of **Now** would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave it untranslated or use a word or phrase that introduces the next step in an argument. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
335	1CO	3	8	s16b	figs-exmetaphor	ὁ φυτεύων…καὶ ὁ ποτίζων, ἕν εἰσιν; ἕκαστος δὲ τὸν ἴδιον μισθὸν λήμψεται, κατὰ τὸν ἴδιον κόπον.	1	he who plants and he who waters are one	Here, Paul continues to speak as if those who proclaim the gospel were farmers who planted and watered their crops. The **one who plants** is the person who begins the farming process, just like the person who first proclaims the gospel. The **one who waters** is the person who continues the farming process by making sure the plants receive what they need to grow, just like the person who continues to teach the gospel. The **one who plants** and the **one who waters** will receive **wages** that match the kind of **labor** they did. In the same way, those who first proclaim the gospel and those who teach more about the gospel will receive rewards from God that match the task they accomplished. If the way Paul uses farming language to describe how people proclaim the gospel and how God rewards those who do so, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the one who invests the money and the one who manages the portfolio are one, and each will receive his own paycheck according to his own job” or “the person who introduces believers to the gospel and the person who teaches believers more about the gospel are one, and each will receive his own reward from God according to his own task” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor)
336	1CO	3	8	ydx8	figs-genericnoun	ὁ φυτεύων…ὁ ποτίζων	1		Just as in [3:7](../03/07.md), when Paul speaks of **the one who plants**, he has himself in mind. When he speaks of **the one who waters**, he has Apollos in mind. This is clear from what he says in [3:6](../03/06.md). However, he is now speaking in more general terms. He does not mean just **one** person who does “planting” and one person who does “watering.” Rather, he wishes to refer to anyone who does either of these tasks. If the phrase **the one who** would not be understood to mean that in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person who does the task. Alternate translation: “any person who plants … any person who waters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
337	1CO	3	8	fsj6	figs-ellipsis	ὁ φυτεύων…ὁ ποτίζων	1		Paul never states what it is that someone **plants** and that someone else **waters**. He does not state what it is because he wishes to use a general statement about farming practices. If you need to state what is planted and watered, you could include a general word or words such as “seed,” “plant,” or “crop.” Alternate translation: “the one who plants the seeds … the one who waters the plants” or “the one who plants the crop … the one who waters it” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
338	1CO	3	8	za43	figs-metaphor	ἕν εἰσιν	1	are one	Paul here speaks as if the **one who plants** and the **one who waters** are the same person. He speaks in this way in order to: (1) show that the **one who plants** and the **one who waters** do the same kind of work with the same goal in mind. Alternate translation: “share a common goal” or “do the same kind of work” (2) state that the **one who plants** and the **one who waters** have equal status. Alternate translation: “are of equal importance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
339	1CO	3	8	dfhn	figs-gendernotations	τὸν ἴδιον	-1		Here, the words translated **his** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of **his** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her own … his or her own” or “that person’s own … that person’s own” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
340	1CO	3	9	vphl	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1		Here, the word translated **For** introduces a summary statement that concludes the whole section in which Paul compares those who proclaim the gospel to farmers ([3:5–8](../03/05–08.md)). If this meaning of **For** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that introduces a summary statement. Alternate translation: “Thus,” or “In the end,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
341	1CO	3	9	gj26	figs-exclusive	ἐσμεν	1	we are brutally beaten	Here, **we** refers to Paul, Apollos, and others who proclaim the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
342	1CO	3	9	r9sn	figs-possession	Θεοῦ…συνεργοί	1	God’s fellow workers	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe: (1) **fellow workers** who work for **God**. Alternate translation: “coworkers under God’s leadership” (2) **workers** who join **God** in God’s work. Alternate translation: “people who work with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
343	1CO	3	9	iaan	figs-infostructure	Θεοῦ γεώργιον, Θεοῦ οἰκοδομή ἐστε.	1		Here, Paul switches from a metaphor about farming to a metaphor about building. He makes this switch without using any connecting words, and he makes the switch within one sentence. Consider whether your language would include the introduction of a new topic at the end of the previous section or at the beginning of a new section, and put **God’s building** where it would be understood as introducing a new section, including **you are** again if it would be necessary. Additionally, if beginning a new section without using a connecting word or phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use such a word or phrase here. Alternate translation: “you are God’s field. In fact, you are also God’s building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
344	1CO	3	9	lqg1	figs-metaphor	Θεοῦ γεώργιον	1	God’s garden	Here, Paul concludes the farming metaphor he began in [3:6](../03/06.md). He identifies the Corinthians as a **field** that is owned by **God**. It is in this field that those who proclaim the gospel “plant” and “water” the crop. By calling the Corinthians a **God’s field**, Paul means to say that they belong to God and that they are the people among whom those who proclaim the gospel work. If the meaning of this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “God’s portfolio” or “people who belong to God and among whom we work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
345	1CO	3	9	l2fq	figs-exmetaphor	Θεοῦ οἰκοδομή	1	God’s building	Here, Paul introduces a new metaphor that compares the Corinthians to a building. This building belongs to God, and those who proclaim the gospel, including Paul, help to construct the building. He uses this metaphor and variations of it in [3:9–17](../03/09–17.md). Here, he calls the Corinthians **God’s building**, by which he means basically the same thing as when he calls them **God’s field**. They belong to God, and he and others who proclaim the gospel work among them. If the meaning of this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “God’s movie” or “people who belong to God and among whom we work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
346	1CO	3	10	iln9	figs-activepassive	τοῦ Θεοῦ τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι	1	According to the grace of God that was given to me	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “that God gave me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
347	1CO	3	10	a69q	figs-exmetaphor	ὡς σοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων θεμέλιον ἔθηκα, ἄλλος δὲ ἐποικοδομεῖ. ἕκαστος δὲ βλεπέτω, πῶς ἐποικοδομεῖ.	1	I laid a foundation	Paul began using the metaphor of a house in [3:9](../03/09.md). Here he continues that metaphor by speaking about himself as a **wise master builder** who lays **a foundation**. By speaking in this way, he means that he is the one who first introduced them to the gospel, just like a **master builder** first lays **a foundation**. He then speaks of people who build **on** that foundation. By speaking in this way, he means that others who proclaim more about the gospel can only do this by using and continuing from the good news that Paul already proclaimed. If this extended metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I proposed an idea for a movie as a skilled script writer, and another is filming that movie, but let each person be careful how they film that movie” or “as a wise church planter, I first proclaimed the gospel to you, and another is teaching you more about that gospel, but let each one be careful how he teaches you more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
348	1CO	3	10	nw8f	figs-infostructure	ὡς σοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων θεμέλιον ἔθηκα	1		The phrase **as a wise master builder** could describe: (1) the way in which Paul **laid a foundation**. Alternate translation: “, I laid a foundation as a wise master builder” (2) the specific **grace** that God gave to Paul. Alternate translation: “to be a wise master builder, I laid a foundation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
349	1CO	3	10	mpxl	translate-unknown	σοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων	1		Here, the word translated **master builder** refers to the person who is in charge of an entire construction project, including designing it and making sure that the building is constructing according to the design. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase. Alternate translation: “a wise architect” or “a wise construction manager” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
350	1CO	3	10	mqb8	writing-pronouns	ἄλλος…ἐποικοδομεῖ	1		Here, the word translated **another** refers to anyone who **is building on** the foundation, including Apollos. However, Paul does not mean to identify one specific person who **is building**. If it would be misunderstood that **another** refers to any builder, you could use a word or phrase that identifies any person who does a specific task. Alternate translation: “other people are building on it” or “someone else is building on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
351	1CO	3	10	pwi7	figs-imperative	ἕκαστος…βλεπέτω	1	another is building on it	Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “each one should be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
352	1CO	3	10	px9c	writing-pronouns	ἕκαστος	1	each man	Here, the word translated **each one** refers to any person who **builds** on the **foundation**. If the meaning of **each one** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies any person who falls into a certain category. Alternate translation: “every person who builds on it” or “each builder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
353	1CO	3	10	krd6	writing-pronouns	ἐποικοδομεῖ	2		Here, the word translated **he** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of **he** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she builds on it” or “each one builds on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
354	1CO	3	11	m4j2	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word translated **for** introduces the reason why the people who build on the foundation should “be careful how” they build “on it” ([3:10](../03/10.md)). They need to “be careful” because what they build must match the only **foundation** that exists, which is **Jesus Christ**. If **for** would not indicate this connection in your language, you could express the idea with a word that gives a reason or basis for a command. Alternate translation: “This is because” or “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
355	1CO	3	11	qd1o	figs-exmetaphor	θεμέλιον…ἄλλον οὐδεὶς δύναται θεῖναι, παρὰ τὸν κείμενον, ὅς ἐστιν Ἰησοῦς Χριστός.	1		In this verse, Paul continues the metaphor about houses by continuing to speak about a **foundation**. Here, he reminds the Corinthians that each house has only one **foundation**, and once that **foundation** has been **laid**, no one lays another **foundation** for the house. He speaks in this way to remind them that only one person can introduce them to the gospel, and anyone who tries to introduce them to another gospel is building a different house, not the same house. Paul then directly states that the **foundation** refers to the message about **Jesus Christ** that he preached to them. Paul speaks in this way to indicate that the message about **Jesus Christ** that he proclaimed to them should be the starting point and basis for everything else they learn about the gospel. If the meaning of this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “no one can write a script other than the one that has already been written, that is, Jesus Christ” or “no one can first proclaim a gospel to you other than the one that I already proclaimed to you, which is Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
356	1CO	3	11	jt2b	figs-activepassive	τὸν κείμενον	1	no one can lay a foundation other than the one that has been laid	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form, with Paul as the person who is doing the “laying.” Alternate translation: “the one that I already laid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
357	1CO	3	11	yh1f		ὅς ἐστιν Ἰησοῦς Χριστός.	1		Alternate translation: “which is Jesus Christ” or (starting a new sentence) “That foundation is Jesus Christ”
358	1CO	3	11	azm0	figs-metonymy	Ἰησοῦς Χριστός	1		Here, Paul uses the words translated **Jesus Christ** to refer to the message he proclaimed to them about **Jesus Christ**. If the meaning of **Jesus Christ** would be misunderstood in your language, you could include a word or phrase that refers to Paul’s message about **Jesus Christ**. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
359	1CO	3	12	nuza	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δέ	1		Here, the word translated **Now** introduces the next step in Paul’s argument. If the meaning of **Now** would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave it untranslated or use a word or phrase that introduces the next step in an argument. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
360	1CO	3	12	nbu2	figs-exmetaphor	εἰ…τις ἐποικοδομεῖ ἐπὶ τὸν θεμέλιον χρυσόν, ἄργυρον, λίθους τιμίους, ξύλα, χόρτον, καλάμην	1	Now if anyone builds on the foundation with gold, silver, precious stones, wood, hay, or straw	Here, Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. He compares those who teach more about the gospel with builders who construct a house on its foundation. These builders can use a variety of different materials to construct the house, and Paul lists six. The first three, **gold, silver, precious stones**, are more durable, while the last three, **wood, hay, straw**, are less durable. It is clear that Paul is interested in durability because of the next verse, where he states that all of these materials will be tested with fire ([3:13](../03/13.md)). By speaking this way, he indicates that those who proclaim more about the gospel can teach things that are more or less true and acceptable to God. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “if anyone films the movie with expensive and sturdy cameras and film or with cheap and fragile cameras and film” or “if anyone teaches you more about the gospel with words that are acceptable to God or words that are not acceptable to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
361	1CO	3	12	f8oa	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ…τις ἐποικοδομεῖ ἐπὶ τὸν θεμέλιον	1		Here, Paul uses a conditional **if**, but he does not think that this is a hypothetical situation or something that is likely not true. Instead, Paul thinks that people are “building” on the foundation, and he wants to talk about how they are doing so. Additionally, the “then” part of the **if** statement does not begin until the next verse. If this form and structure would be misunderstood in your language, you could rephrase the condition into a circumstance or an assumption. Alternate translation: “people build on the foundation, using” or “when anyone builds on the foundation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
362	1CO	3	12	tzgf	translate-unknown	χρυσόν, ἄργυρον, λίθους τιμίους, ξύλα, χόρτον, καλάμην,	1		These six things are all materials that could be used in constructing buildings. The first three will survive if the building catches on fire, but the last three will not (for the fire, see [3:13–15](../03/13–15.md)). In your culture, you may not use all of these materials for constructing buildings. In that case, you could include just some of these materials or include materials that you do use for constructing buildings in your culture, making sure to include some materials will not burn up and others that will burn up. Alternate translation: “steel, concrete, lumber, or cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
363	1CO	3	13	ndu3	figs-exmetaphor	ἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον φανερὸν γενήσεται; ἡ γὰρ ἡμέρα δηλώσει, ὅτι ἐν πυρὶ ἀποκαλύπτεται; καὶ ἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον, ὁποῖόν ἐστιν, τὸ πῦρ αὐτὸ δοκιμάσει	1	For it will be revealed in fire. The fire will test the quality of what each one had done	Here, Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. He speaks as if **the day** of God’s judgment is like a fire that **will test** the building and show what kind of building materials the builders used. Paul speaks in this way to illustrate how God’s judgment will reveal whether what those who proclaim more about the gospel teach is pleasing to him or not. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the work of each one will become evident, for opening night will display it; for opening night always draws critics, and the critics will test of what value is the work of each one” or “the truth of what each one has taught you will become evident, for God will show how true it is when he comes to judge everyone; when he comes, he will judge everyone, and his judgment will reveal whether what each person has taught is true or not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
364	1CO	3	13	wv4h	figs-synecdoche	ἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον	1		Here, Paul uses the word translated **work** to refer to the product or result of the **work**, not the action of “working.” If that meaning for **work** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to the product of the **work**. Alternate translation: “what each one has made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
365	1CO	3	13	t2mk	figs-activepassive	ἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον φανερὸν γενήσεται	1	his work will be revealed	If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea using words such as “God will reveal.” Alternate translation: “God will reveal the work of each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
366	1CO	3	13	mv14	figs-explicit	ἡ…ἡμέρα δηλώσει	1	for the daylight will reveal it	Here, Paul uses the word translated **day** in the same way the Old Testament uses it: to refer to an event in which God saves his people and punishes his enemies. Paul specifically refers to the event in which Jesus returns to judge everyone. If that meaning of **day** would be misunderstood in your language, you could include more words that clarify what Paul means by **day**. Alternate translation: “the day of Christ’s return will display” or “when Christ returns, he will display it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
367	1CO	3	13	lyny	figs-activepassive	ἐν πυρὶ ἀποκαλύπτεται	1		If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God reveals it in fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
368	1CO	3	13	x48s	writing-pronouns	ἀποκαλύπτεται	1		Here, **it** refers to **the day**. It does not refer to the **work**. If the meaning of **it** would be misunderstood in your language, you clarify that **it** refers to **the day**. Alternate translation: “that day is revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
369	1CO	3	13	ozx6		ἀποκαλύπτεται	1		Here, Paul speaks as if the day **is revealed** right now. In his language, he can use the present tense to speak about the way in which something happens in general, even if it is not happening in the present moment. If this use of the present tense would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using the future tense. Alternate translation: “it will be revealed”
370	1CO	3	13	rgfy		ἐν πυρὶ	1		Alternate translation: “with fire” or “in a fiery way”
371	1CO	3	14	wexj	figs-hypo	εἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον μενεῖ, ὃ ἐποικοδόμησεν, μισθὸν λήμψεται.	1		Here and in [3:15](../03/15.md), Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person’s **work** might remain, or it might not. He then specifies the result for each possibility. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “Anyone whose work that he built will remain will receive a reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
372	1CO	3	14	ygva	figs-exmetaphor	εἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον μενεῖ, ὃ ἐποικοδόμησεν, μισθὸν λήμψεται.	1		Here, Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. In this verse, he notes that builders whose structures survive a fire receive rewards. He speaks in this way to indicate that God will reward those who proclaim more about the gospel if God finds their teachings to be accurate and acceptable to him when he judges everyone. The **reward** includes public recognition and other blessings. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “If anyone's film that he created receives good reviews on opening night, he will receive an award” or “If anyone teaches you more about the gospel with words that are acceptable to God, he will be honored by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
373	1CO	3	14	iddt	figs-explicitinfo	τινος τὸ ἔργον…ὃ ἐποικοδόμησεν	1		Here, Paul speaks both of **work** and what **he built**. If using both of these terms would be misunderstood or redundant in your language, you could combine the ideas into one expression. Alternate translation: “anyone’s building project” or “what anyone built” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
374	1CO	3	14	s4u3	figs-synecdoche	τὸ ἔργον	1	work remains	Here, Paul uses the word translated **work** to refer to the product or result of the **work**, not the action of “working.” If that meaning for **work** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to the product of the **work**. Alternate translation: “project” or “house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
375	1CO	3	14	tec9		μενεῖ	1		Alternate translation: “does not burn up”
376	1CO	3	14	ge6s	figs-gendernotations	τινος…ἐποικοδόμησεν…λήμψεται	1		Here, the word translated **he** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of **he** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “anyone’s … he or she built … he or she will receive” or “people’s … they built … they will receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
377	1CO	3	15	vax6	figs-hypo	εἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον κατακαήσεται, ζημιωθήσεται	1		Here, just as in [3:14](../03/14.md), Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person’s work might remain, or it might not. He then specifies the result for each possibility. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “Anyone whose work will be burned up will suffer loss” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
378	1CO	3	15	ysjz	figs-exmetaphor	εἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον κατακαήσεται, ζημιωθήσεται; αὐτὸς δὲ σωθήσεται, οὕτως δὲ ὡς διὰ πυρός.	1		Here, Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. In this verse, he notes that builders whose structures do not survive a fire **suffer loss**. The builders themselves do not die, but they are in trouble, almost as if they were in the building and barely escaped as it burned to the ground. Paul speaks in this way to indicate that God will not reward those who proclaim more about the gospel if God finds their teachings to be inaccurate and unacceptable to him when he judges everyone. The **loss** includes lack of honor and rewards from God. However, those who proclaim more about God in inaccurate and unacceptable ways are not condemned to punishment by God. Instead, just like someone escaping from a burning building, they are just barely accepted by God. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “If anyone's film that he created receives bad reviews on opening night, he will lose money on the film, but he himself will not face financial ruin, but as though through bankruptcy” or “If anyone teaches you more about the gospel with words that are not acceptable to God, he will receive no honor or blessing when God judges everyone, but he himself will be accepted by God, although just barely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
379	1CO	3	15	c2xj	figs-activepassive	τινος τὸ ἔργον κατακαήσεται	1	if anyone’s work is burned up	If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with “fire” as the subject. Alternate translation: “fire burns up anyone’s work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
380	1CO	3	15	fyfr	figs-activepassive	τὸ ἔργον	1		Here, Paul uses the word translated **work** to refer to the product or result of the **work**, not the action of “working.” If that meaning for **work** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to the product of the **work**. Alternate translation: “project” or “house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
381	1CO	3	15	b2l8	figs-gendernotations	τινος…ζημιωθήσεται…αὐτὸς…σωθήσεται	1		Here, the words translated **he** and **himself** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of **he** and **himself** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “anyone’s … he or she will suffer loss … he himself or she herself will be saved” or “people’s … they will suffer loss … they themselves will be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
382	1CO	3	15	ups4	translate-unknown	ζημιωθήσεται	1	he will suffer loss	The phrase **he will suffer loss** expresses the opposite of “receiving a reward.” Instead of gaining honor and money, the person loses honor and money. If the phrase **he will suffer loss** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to losing honor and money. Alternate translation: “he will lose honor and money” or “he will be deprived of any reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
383	1CO	3	15	w1zv	figs-activepassive	αὐτὸς δὲ σωθήσεται	1	but he himself will be saved	If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with **he** saving **himself** or **he** not perishing. Alternate translation: “but he will save himself” or “but he will not perish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
384	1CO	3	16	uq2g	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐστε, καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ οἰκεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν?	1	Do you not know that you are God’s temple and that the Spirit of God lives in you?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information or for agreement or disagreement. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing by reminding them of something that they should already know. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “you know that you are a temple of God, and you know that the Spirit of God lives in you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
385	1CO	3	16	yc1g	figs-exmetaphor	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐστε, καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ οἰκεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν?	1		Here, Paul develops the metaphor about constructing a building in a new way. First, he says that the Corinthians together are **a temple of God**, which is a specific type of building. The **temple of God** was the place where God was present in a special way. Paul is thus identifying the Corinthians as people among whom God is present in the same kind of special way. Second, he says that the Corinthians together are the house or city in which the **Spirit of God lives**. The house or city in which someone lives is where they are always present. Paul is thus saying that the Holy Spirit is always present with the Corinthians. If the meaning of Paul’s metaphors would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea in non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “Do you not know that you are the sacred shrine where God dwells, and you are the country in which the Spirit of God has residency?” or “Do you not know that God is present among you, and the Spirit of God is always with you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
386	1CO	3	17	pc0d	figs-exmetaphor	εἴ τις τὸν ναὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ φθείρει, φθερεῖ τοῦτον ὁ Θεός; ὁ γὰρ ναὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ ἅγιός ἐστιν, οἵτινές ἐστε ὑμεῖς.	1		Here, Paul finishes the metaphor about the temple that he began in [3:16](../03/16.md). He notes that, because God’s temple is **holy**, God will **destroy** anyone who **destroys** the temple. He then again repeats that the Corinthians **are** the temple. By speaking in this way, Paul wishes to remind everyone among the Corinthian believers that “destroying” the unity of the believers is like “destroying” the **temple**, and God will act in response to this like he would if someone “destroyed” his **temple**. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “If anyone desecrates God’s sacred shrine, God will punish that person. For the sacred shrine is holy, and you are God’s sacred shrine” or “If anyone divides the place of God’s presence, God will punish that person. For wherever God’s presence can be found is holy, and you are the place where God’s presence can be found” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
387	1CO	3	17	pv8w	figs-hypo	εἴ τις τὸν ναὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ φθείρει, φθερεῖ τοῦτον ὁ Θεός	1		Here, Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person might destroy God’s temple, or that person might not. He then specifies the result for if someone does destroy God’s temple. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “God will destroy anyone who destroys the temple of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
388	1CO	3	17	vcuv	writing-pronouns	οἵτινές ἐστε ὑμεῖς	1		Here, the word translated **which** could refer to: (1) **the temple of God**. Alternate translation: “which temple you are” (2) **holy**. Alternate translation: “and you too are holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
389	1CO	3	18	glg8	figs-imperative	μηδεὶς ἑαυτὸν ἐξαπατάτω…μωρὸς γενέσθω	1	Let no one deceive himself	In this verse, Paul uses two third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “No one should deceive himself … he should become a ‘fool’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
390	1CO	3	18	s57s	figs-gendernotations	μηδεὶς ἑαυτὸν ἐξαπατάτω; εἴ τις δοκεῖ σοφὸς εἶναι ἐν ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ, μωρὸς γενέσθω, ἵνα γένηται σοφός.	1		Here, the words translated **himself**, **he**, and **him** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of **himself**, **he**, and **him** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using words that do not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “Let no one deceive himself or herself. If anyone among you thinks he or she is wise in this age, let him or her become a ‘fool,’ that he or she may become wise” or “Let no people deceive themselves. If any people among you think they are wise in this age, them become ‘fools,’ that they may become wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
391	1CO	3	18	p3wi	figs-hypo	εἴ τις δοκεῖ σοφὸς εἶναι ἐν ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ, μωρὸς γενέσθω	1	in this age	Here, Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person might think that **he is wise**, or that person might not think this. He then specifies the result for if someone does think that **he is wise**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “Let whoever among you thinks he is wise in this age become a ‘fool’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
392	1CO	3	18	p53y		ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ	1		Alternate translation: “according to the standards of this age”
393	1CO	3	18	s7xi	figs-irony	μωρὸς γενέσθω, ἵνα γένηται σοφός	1	let him become a “fool”	Here, Paul commands any **wise** person among the Corinthians to become a **fool**. He does not actually think that doing what he commands makes a person a **fool**, which is why **fool** appears in quotation marks. Rather, he knows that many will call doing what he commands becoming a **fool**. To make this clearer, he then says that becoming what many will call **a “fool”** will actually lead to becoming truly **wise**. If Paul’s use of the word **fool** would be misunderstood by your readers, you could use a form in your language that indicates that Paul is speaking from the perspective of other people. Alternate translation: “let him become a so-called ‘fool,’ that he may become truly wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
394	1CO	3	18	pvt3	translate-grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		Here, the word translated **that** introduces the goal or purpose for which a person should **become a “fool”**. If the meaning of **that** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that introduces a goal or purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
395	1CO	3	19	m0gd	figs-possession	ἡ…σοφία τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe what **this world** considers to be **wisdom**. If **the wisdom of this world** would be not be understood in your language as **wisdom** from the perspective of **this world**, you could use a different form that makes this meaning clear. Alternate translation: “what this world considers to be wisdom” or “worldly wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
396	1CO	3	19	uqb3	figs-idiom	παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1		Here, Paul uses the phrase **with God** to identify God’s perspective. If **with God** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that identifies that this is **foolishness** according to how God views the world. Alternate translation: “from God’s perspective” or “in God’s eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
397	1CO	3	19	ayvv	writing-quotations	γέγραπται γάρ	1		In Paul’s culture, **For it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Job.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it can be read in the Old Testament” or “For the book of Job says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
398	1CO	3	19	zws3	figs-quotations	γέγραπται…ὁ δρασσόμενος τοὺς σοφοὺς ἐν τῇ πανουργίᾳ αὐτῶν	1	He catches the wise in their craftiness	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “it is written that God catches the wise in their craftiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
399	1CO	3	19	wxz2	figs-metaphor	δρασσόμενος τοὺς σοφοὺς ἐν τῇ πανουργίᾳ αὐτῶν	1		Here, Paul speaks as if God reaches out and grabs **the wise** as they act in **craftiness**. By speaking in this way, he means that even “crafty” or clever people cannot avoid God when he wishes to “catch” them. God is not deceived, and he can disrupt their clever plans. If **catches** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “interrupts the clever plans of the wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
400	1CO	3	19	j0ga	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς σοφοὺς	1		Paul is using the adjective **wise** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this adjective with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “wise people” or “those who are wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
401	1CO	3	19	x6ts	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πανουργίᾳ	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **craftiness** by using a phrase such as “crafty plans” or “clever planning.” Alternate translation: “crafty plans” or “clever planning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
402	1CO	3	20	n5pu	writing-quotations	καὶ πάλιν	1		In Paul’s culture, **And again** is a normal way to introduce another quotation from an important text that supports the same point. In this case, Paul quotes from the Old Testament book titled “Psalms.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is introducing another quotation from an important text. Alternate translation: “It can be read in another place in the Old Testament” or “And the book of Psalms also says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
403	1CO	3	20	la6x	figs-quotations	Κύριος γινώσκει τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς τῶν σοφῶν, ὅτι εἰσὶν μάταιοι	1	The Lord knows that the reasoning of the wise is futile	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “that the Lord knows the reasonings of the wise, that they are futile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
404	1CO	3	20	gvyq	figs-explicitinfo	γινώσκει τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς τῶν σοφῶν, ὅτι εἰσὶν μάταιοι	1		If the form **the reasonings of the wise, that they** would be redundant in your language, you could express the idea without the redundant words. Alternate translation: “knows that the reasonings of the wise are futile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
405	1CO	3	20	ot38	figs-abstractnouns	τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς τῶν σοφῶν	1		If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **reasonings** with a verb such as “reason” or “plan.” Alternate translation: “the things that the wise reason” or “the things that the wise plan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
406	1CO	3	20	tlk9	figs-nominaladj	τῶν σοφῶν	1		Paul is using the adjective **wise** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this adjective with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of wise people” or “of those who are wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
407	1CO	3	20	kz2u		εἰσὶν μάταιοι	1	futile	Alternate translation: “they will come to nothing” or “they are worthless”
408	1CO	3	21	molu	figs-imperative	μηδεὶς καυχάσθω ἐν ἀνθρώποις	1		Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “no one should boast in men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
409	1CO	3	21	xyti	figs-idiom	μηδεὶς καυχάσθω ἐν ἀνθρώποις	1		The phrase **boast in men** means that a person is boasting “about” humans. If **boast in** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clarifies that the “boasting” has **men** as its content. Alternate translation: “let no one boast about men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
410	1CO	3	21	k9i3	figs-explicit	ἐν ἀνθρώποις	1		The next verse makes it clear that here Paul specifically has leaders in mind. He wishes to tell the Corinthians that they should not boast about having a specific leader that they follow. If this meaning of **in men** would not be understood in your language, you could include some words that clarify that it refers to following leaders. Alternate translation: “in men that they follow” or “in men whose group they are part of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
411	1CO	3	21	ogfq	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1		Although the word translated men is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “in people” or “in men or women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
412	1CO	3	21	g0hr	figs-explicit	πάντα…ὑμῶν ἐστιν	1		Here, **all things are yours** also implies that **boasting in men** is foolish. If the Corinthians have everything, then boasting about following a specific leader does not make sense. All the Corinthians have all the leaders, and much more beyond that (see [3:22](../03/22.md)). If it would be misunderstood in your language that **all things are yours** implies these conclusions, you could include a phrase that states these conclusions. Alternate translation: “all things are yours, including all leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
413	1CO	3	22	lrlg	translate-names	Παῦλος…Ἀπολλῶς…Κηφᾶς	1		These are the names of three men. They are the same men who were mentioned in [1:12](../01/12.md) as leaders whom the Corinthians were claiming to follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
414	1CO	3	22	x1w6		εἴτε Παῦλος, εἴτε Ἀπολλῶς, εἴτε Κηφᾶς, εἴτε κόσμος, εἴτε ζωὴ, εἴτε θάνατος, εἴτε ἐνεστῶτα, εἴτε μέλλοντα;	1		Paul does not want his readers to think that this list tells the Corinthians everything that they have. Rather, he uses the list to give examples. If the use of this list would be misunderstood in your language, you could include a word or phrase that shows that the list gives examples. Alternate translation: “including Paul and Apollos and Cephas and the world and life and death and things present and things to come”
415	1CO	3	22	o3k5	figs-explicit	εἴτε ζωὴ, εἴτε θάνατος	1		When Paul says that **life** and **death** are theirs, he means that neither **life** nor **death** has control over the Corinthians. Rather, they have control over **life** and **death**. What this means is that they can live their lives without being afraid of what will happen while they are alive or afraid of losing their lives when they die. If the meaning of the **life** and **death** would be misunderstood in your language, you could add some words that clarify their meaning. Alternate translation: “or confidence in life or peace in death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
416	1CO	3	22	pyir	figs-explicit	εἴτε ἐνεστῶτα, εἴτε μέλλοντα	1		Here, Paul refers to **things present** because it refers to what was happening at the time when Paul wrote this letter. On the other hand, **things to come** refers to what is going to happen in the future, specifically when Jesus comes back. The **things present** is the way the world works right now. The **things to come** is the way the world will work when Jesus returns. If the meaning of these phrases would be misunderstood in your language, you could add some words that clarify their meaning. Alternate translation: “or the current order or the order that Jesus will bring” or “or what happens now or what will happen soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
417	1CO	3	22	jt0x	figs-infostructure	πάντα ὑμῶν	1		Here, Paul uses the same phrase he used at the end of [3:21](../03/21.md): **all things are yours**. He repeats the phrase here to explain that the list provides examples of **all things** and also to introduce the point he is about to make in the next verse. Because **all things are yours** ends the list and also introduces the next idea, the ULT begins a new sentence with **all things are yours**. Use whatever form in your language most clearly identifies a conclusion that also introduces the next statement. Alternate translation: “Thus, all things are yours,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
418	1CO	3	23	nj48	figs-possession	ὑμεῖς…Χριστοῦ	1	you are Christ’s, and Christ is God’s	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to show the Corinthians that they belong to Christ. If the meaning of this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “belong to” or a verb such as “has.” Alternate translation: “you belong to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
419	1CO	3	23	dc6v	figs-possession	Χριστὸς…Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to show the Corinthians that **Christ** belongs to who **God** is. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “belongs to” or a verb such as “includes.” Alternate translation: “Christ belongs to God” or “who God is includes Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
420	1CO	4	intro	vg5z			0		# 1 Corinthians 4 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Pride<br><br>Paul contrasts the Corinthians being proud with the apostles being humble. The Corinthian believers had no reason to be proud. All that they had, and all they were, was a gift from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphors<br><br>Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. He describes the apostles as servants. Paul speaks of a victory parade where the apostles are the prisoners who will be killed. He uses a rod to stand for punishment. He calls himself their father because he is their “spiritual father.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])<br><br>### Irony<br><br>Paul uses irony to shame the Corinthians for being proud. The Corinthian believers are reigning but the apostles are suffering. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
421	1CO	4	1	nkda	figs-explicitinfo	οὕτως ἡμᾶς λογιζέσθω ἄνθρωπος ὡς	1		If the form **In this manner let a man regard us: as** would be redundant in your language, you could express the idea without the redundant words. Alternate translation: “Let a man regard us as” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo)
422	1CO	4	1	k1v5	figs-imperative	ἡμᾶς λογιζέσθω ἄνθρωπος	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “a man should regard us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
423	1CO	4	1	xt4u	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος	1		Although the word translated **man** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “man or woman” or “human” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
424	1CO	4	1	fk8c	figs-genericnoun	ἄνθρωπος	1		Paul uses the word **man** to speak of people in general, not one specific person. If the meaning of **man** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a form that indicates people in general in your language. Alternate translation: “everybody” or “any person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
425	1CO	4	1	px42	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1		Here, **us** refers to Paul, Apollos, and others who proclaim the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
426	1CO	4	1	if6t	figs-possession	οἰκονόμους μυστηρίων Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **stewards** who are in charge of **the mysteries of God**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “manage” or “oversee.” Alternate translation: “stewards who manage the mysteries of God” or “stewards who oversee the mysteries of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
427	1CO	4	1	duab	figs-possession	μυστηρίων Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **mysteries** that are: (1) revealed by **God**. Alternate translation: “of the mysteries given by God” or “of the mysteries from God” (2) about **God**. Alternate translation: “of the mysteries about God” or “of the mysteries concerning God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
428	1CO	4	2	th8e	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὧδε λοιπὸν	1	what is required of stewards	Here, Paul uses the phrase **In this case** to introduce further information about what it means to be **stewards**. Since he is talking about himself and others who proclaim the gospel as **stewards**, it is important to understand what it is that **stewards** are **required** to do. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces more information about a topic. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Speaking of stewards,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
429	1CO	4	2	de61	figs-explicit	ζητεῖται ἐν τοῖς οἰκονόμοις, ἵνα πιστός τις εὑρεθῇ	1		While Paul does not directly apply this sentence to himself and others who proclaim the gospel, it is clear that he intends the reader to apply it to him and these others. Paul then means that he and others who proclaim the gospel are required to do so faithfully by God. If this implication would not be understood by your readers, you could a word or phrase that makes it clear by identifying Paul as one of the stewards. Alternate translation: “it is required in stewards like us that we be found faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
430	1CO	4	2	qek0	figs-activepassive	ζητεῖται	1		If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with a vague subject or “masters” as the subject. Alternate translation: “people require” or “a master requires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
431	1CO	4	2	dpeo	figs-activepassive	πιστός τις εὑρεθῇ	1		If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with a vague subject or “masters” as the subject. Alternate translation: “people find one faithful” or “a master finds one faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
432	1CO	4	2	yesr	writing-pronouns	τις	1		Here, Paul uses **one** to refer to any of the **stewards**. If **one** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a plural pronoun such as “they.” Alternate translation: “they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
433	1CO	4	3	t133		ἐμοὶ…ἐστιν	1		Alternate translation: “I consider it” or “from my perspective”
434	1CO	4	3	fspp	figs-idiom	εἰς ἐλάχιστόν ἐστιν	1		When Paul says that **it is a very small thing** for him to **be examined**, what he means is that their “examination” of him is unimportant to him. Whether they think he has been faithful or not does not matter to him at all. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “it is no big deal” or “it has no significance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
435	1CO	4	3	k6nc	figs-activepassive	ὑφ’ ὑμῶν ἀνακριθῶ, ἢ ὑπὸ ἀνθρωπίνης ἡμέρας;	1	it is a very small thing that I should be judged by you	If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “you or a human court would examine me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
436	1CO	4	3	l2tt	translate-unknown	ἀνθρωπίνης ἡμέρας	1		Here, the words translated **a human court** refer to an official legal proceeding where whether Paul was faithful or not could be judged by those in charge. Here, he uses the words primarily to refer to any people who are in charge of this legal proceeding. If this language would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to an official meeting to decide whether someone is innocent or guilty or a word or phrase that refers to who is in charge at such a meeting. Alternate translation: “a court of law” or “a human jury” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
437	1CO	4	3	skwh	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἀλλ’	1		Here, the word translated **For** introduces an even stronger statement about how little Paul cares about being **examined** by humans. He cares so little that he does not even **examine** himself. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that normally introduces a further, stronger statement. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
438	1CO	4	4	u9jd	figs-idiom	οὐδὲν…ἐμαυτῷ σύνοιδα	1	I am not aware of any charge being made against me	Paul says that he is **aware of nothing against** himself. By this, he means that he does not know about anything that could be used to accuse him. He is not aware of anything he has done wrong. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I have a clear conscience” or “I cannot think of any wrong things I have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
439	1CO	4	4	h3wl	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐν τούτῳ δεδικαίωμαι;	1	that does not mean I am innocent. It is the Lord who judges me	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “this does not justify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
440	1CO	4	4	bulo	writing-pronouns	τούτῳ	1		The word translated **this** refers back to the whole idea that Paul is **aware of nothing against** himself. If the meaning of **this** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that it refers back to the whole previous statement. Alternate translation: “what I am aware of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
441	1CO	4	4	hjob	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Paul uses the word translated **but** to introduce a contrast with everyone else who might “examine” Paul (see [4:3–4](../04/03.md)). If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast with several previous statements. Alternate translation: “Instead,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
442	1CO	4	4	f6bb		ὁ…ἀνακρίνων με Κύριός ἐστιν.	1		Alternate translation: “the Lord is the one who judges me”
443	1CO	4	5	qi3g	figs-explicitinfo	πρὸ καιροῦ…ἕως ἂν ἔλθῃ ὁ Κύριος	1	Therefore	If the form **before the time, until the Lord comes** contains redundant information that would be unnatural to state in your language, you could express the idea without the redundant words. Alternate translation: “before the Lord comes” or “until the Lord comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
444	1CO	4	5	wl3i	figs-metaphor	ὃς καὶ φωτίσει τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους	1	He will bring to light the hidden things of darkness and reveal the purposes of the heart	Here, Paul speaks as if **the Lord** will bring a flashlight or torch when he comes, and he will use that torch or flashlight to shine **light** on things that are currently **hidden** in the **darkness**. By speaking in this way, Paul means that **the Lord** will reveal what no person knows right now. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “who will both disclose what people do not know about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
445	1CO	4	5	dcje	figs-possession	τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **things** that are **hidden** in **darkness**. If the **hidden things** would not be understood to be in **darkness** in your language, you could express the idea by using a word such “in” or “within.” Alternate translation: “the things hidden in darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
446	1CO	4	5	ywuk	figs-abstractnoun	τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους	1		If your language does not use the abstract noun **darkness**, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that describes something that cannot be seen because there is no light, such as “in shadow.” Alternate translation: “the hidden things in shadow” or “the things hidden where no light shines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
447	1CO	4	5	spwh	figs-possession	τὰς βουλὰς τῶν καρδιῶν	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **purposes** that come from or are created in **the hearts**. If it would be misunderstood in your language that **the purposes** are located in **the hearts**, you could express the idea by using a word such as “from” or “in.” Alternate translation: “the purposes in the hearts” or “the purposes from the hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
448	1CO	4	5	tgdg	translate-unknown	τὰς βουλὰς	1		Here, **purposes** refers to how humans have specific goals in mind and plan ways of attaining those goals. If the meaning of **purposes** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word such as “plans” or “intentions.” Alternate translation: “the plans” or “the intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
449	1CO	4	5	tgox	figs-metonymy	τῶν καρδιῶν	1		In Paul’s culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. If that meaning of **hearts** would be misunderstood in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “of the minds” or “that humans plan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
450	1CO	4	5	pw6r	figs-idiom	ὁ ἔπαινος γενήσεται ἑκάστῳ ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul speaks as if **praise** were something that could **come** or travel from **God** to humans. Paul means that **God** is the source of the **praise** that **each one** will receive. If the meaning of this sentence would be misunderstood in your language, you could make **God** the person who gives the **praise**. Alternate translation: “God will give praise to each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
451	1CO	4	5	kcya	figs-explicit	ὁ ἔπαινος γενήσεται ἑκάστῳ ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul seems to say that every person will receive some **praise** from **God**. However, Paul does not mean this. Instead, he only gives the example of the person who has been faithful to God, not the example of the person who has not been faithful to God. If using only one example would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that this example is only about those who are faithful, or you could include the opposite example about those who have been unfaithful. Alternate translation: “the praise from God will come to each faithful one” or “the praise and blame from God will come to teach one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
452	1CO	4	6	agfz	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1		The word translated **these things** refers back to everything Paul has said about himself and Apollos in [3:4–23](../03/04.md). If what **these things** refers to would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that it refers to what Paul has said about farming and building. Alternate translation: “what I have said about farming and building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
453	1CO	4	6	ijn5	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although the word translated **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
454	1CO	4	6	xxp2	translate-names	Ἀπολλῶν	1		This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
455	1CO	4	6	ymxi	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1		Here, the word **us** refers to Paul and Apollos only. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
456	1CO	4	6	ziz9	figs-quotations	μάθητε, τό μὴ ὑπὲρ ἃ γέγραπται	1	for your sakes	If you your language does not use this form, you could translate this statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “you might learn not to go beyond what is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
457	1CO	4	6	o02a	figs-explicit	τό μὴ ὑπὲρ ἃ γέγραπται,	1		Here, Paul quotes a short phrase that is not from the Old Testament but that would have been well-known to the Corinthians. The phrase **what is written** could refer to: (1) the Old Testament scriptures. Paul is telling the Corinthians that they should only act in ways that the Old Testament approves of. Alternate translation: “Not beyond what the scriptures say” (2) general principles of life that everyone knows about. Paul is telling the Corinthians that they should only act in ways that are generally approved and accepted. Alternate translation: “Not beyond proper standards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
458	1CO	4	6	hk55	figs-infostructure	ἵνα	2		The statement introduced by **so that** could be the purpose of (1) learning that they should not go **beyond what is written**. Alternate translation: “with the goal that” (2) Paul applying **these things** to himself and Apollos. Alternate translation: “so that, in the end,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
459	1CO	4	6	e79m	figs-activepassive	μὴ εἷς…φυσιοῦσθε	1		If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with **no one** as the subject and the object. Alternate translation: “no one would puff himself or herself up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
460	1CO	4	6	hjfu	writing-pronouns	τοῦ ἑνὸς…τοῦ ἑτέρου	1		The words translated **the one** and **the other** refer to any specific leaders the Corinthians might praise or blame. Perhaps Paul specifically has himself and Apollos in mind, but he intentionally uses words that would include any leader whom the Corinthians could praise or blame. If the meaning of **the one** and **the other** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is speaking generally of any leaders here. Alternate translation: “of any leader … any other leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
461	1CO	4	7	fnu3	figs-yousingular	σε…ἔχεις…ἔλαβες…ἔλαβες…καυχᾶσαι…λαβών	1	between you … do you have that you did not … you have freely … do you boast … you had not	In this verse, Paul uses the singular form for **you**. He does this in order to directly address each specific person among the Corinthian believers. In the next verse, he again uses the plural form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
462	1CO	4	7	gtb5	figs-rquestion	τίς…σε διακρίνει?	1	For who makes you superior?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no one.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is no one who makes you superior.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
463	1CO	4	7	r6yw	figs-rquestion	τί…ἔχεις ὃ οὐκ ἔλαβες?	1	What do you have that you did not freely receive?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nothing.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is nothing that you have that you did not receive.” or “you received everything that you have.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
464	1CO	4	7	eixw	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ δὲ καὶ ἔλαβες	1		Paul is speaking as if “receiving it” were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “And since you indeed received it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
465	1CO	4	7	e8l2	figs-rquestion	τί καυχᾶσαι ὡς μὴ λαβών?	1	why do you boast as if you had not done so?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. Here, there is no answer to the question, since that is exactly Paul’s point. There is no reason for them to **boast**. If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea as an imperative or a “should” statement. Alternate translation: “do not boast as if you did not receive it.” or “you should not boast as if you did not receive it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
466	1CO	4	7	p0hg	writing-pronouns	ἔλαβες…λαβών	2		Here, both uses of **it** refer back to **what** the Corinthians **have**. If your language does not use **it** to refer to an unstated “thing,” you could use a word or phrase that does refer clearly back to **what** the Corinthians **have**. Alternate translation: “you received everything … you did … receive everything” or “you received what you have … you did … receive what you have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
467	1CO	4	8	yp8s	figs-irony	ἤδη κεκορεσμένοι ἐστέ, ἤδη ἐπλουτήσατε, χωρὶς ἡμῶν ἐβασιλεύσατε	1	General Information:	With these statements, Paul is stating what he thinks the Corinthians would say about themselves. He does not mean that he believes that these things are true. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could include some words that clarify that Paul is speaking from the Corinthians’s perspective, such as “it is as if” or “you say.” Alternate translation: “Already it is as if you are satisfied! Already it is as if you have become rich! It is as if you began to reign apart from us” or “Already you say that you are satisfied! Already you say that you have become rich! You say that you have begun to reign apart from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
468	1CO	4	8	v77u	figs-metaphor	κεκορεσμένοι ἐστέ	1		Here, Paul speaks as if the Corinthians have had more than enough food to eat and beverages to drink. By this, he means that (they think that) they have so many spiritual blessings that there are no more that they can receive. If the meaning of **satisfied** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you are stuffed with blessings” or “you have every spiritual gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
469	1CO	4	8	uc7s	figs-metaphor	ἐπλουτήσατε	1		Here, Paul speaks as if the Corinthians have become wealthy people. He speaks in this way to again emphasize that (they think that) they have more spiritual blessings than they need. If the meaning of **become rich** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you have become fat” or “you have an excess of spiritual gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
470	1CO	4	8	mpir	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν…ἡμεῖς	1		Here, **us** and **we** refer to Paul and others who proclaim the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
471	1CO	4	9	bb41	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1	God has put us apostles on display	Here, the word translated **For** introduces evidence that Paul and the other apostles are not “reigning” right now. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a contrast word such as “rather” or use a word or phrase that indicates that this sentence provides evidence that Paul is not “reigning.” Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “You can tell we are not reigning, since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
472	1CO	4	9	v0bg	translate-unknown	δοκῶ	1		Here, the word translated **I think** introduces Paul’s own opinion of what he and other **apostles** are meant to do and experience. If the meaning of **I think** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that introduces a person’s interpretation or opinion. Alternate translation: “in my opinion,” or “it seems to me that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
473	1CO	4	9	lz8v	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς…ἐγενήθημεν	1		Here, **we** and **us** refer to Paul and his fellow apostles. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
474	1CO	4	9	vfq3	figs-metaphor	ἡμᾶς τοὺς ἀποστόλους ἐσχάτους ἀπέδειξεν, ὡς ἐπιθανατίους	1	has put us apostles on display	Here, Paul uses a metaphor that identifies himself and other apostles as those who receive public humiliation and are put to death. The metaphor itself: (1) could refer to a Roman gladiatorial contest. The apostles, then, would be **exhibited** in the arena as part of the **last** event. As those who are **sentenced to death**, they would then die in this last event. Alternate translation: “has exhibited us apostles in the last event of the gladiatorial games, in which we are destined to die” (2) could refer to a victory parade. The apostles, then, would be **exhibited** at the end of the parade, or **last**. As the **last** prisoners, they are **sentenced to death**, and will be killed soon after the parade ends. Alternate translation: “has exhibited us apostles at the end of the victory parade, in the place where prisoners who are sentenced to death march” (3) could be misunderstood in your language. If this is the case, you could express the idea in non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “has chosen us apostles to be humiliated, and we are destined to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
475	1CO	4	9	ayu9	translate-unknown	ἐσχάτους	1		The word translated **last of all** could identify: (1) the time when the **apostles** are **exhibited**, which would be as the last event held in the arena. Alternate translation: “at the end” (2) the place where the **apostles** are **exhibited**, which would be at the end of the victory parade. Alternate translation: “last in line” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
476	1CO	4	9	e4i1	figs-metaphor	θέατρον ἐγενήθημεν τῷ κόσμῳ, καὶ ἀγγέλοις καὶ ἀνθρώποις	1		Here, Paul speaks as if he and other apostles were part of a gladiatorial game or a theatrical show. He speaks in this way to show that the humiliation and death he and other apostles suffer happens in public, with everyone watching to see what happens. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “we live in full view of the world—both of angels and of men” or “we undergo these things publicly, before the world—both angels and men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
477	1CO	4	9	cqh4	figs-infostructure	τῷ κόσμῳ, καὶ ἀγγέλοις καὶ ἀνθρώποις	1	to the world—to angels, and to human beings	This structure could mean that: (1) Paul wants to define the **world** as **angels** and **men**. Alternate translation: “to the world, that is, both to angels and to men” (2) Paul is listing three different things. Alternate translation: “to the world, to angels, and to men.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
478	1CO	4	9	d8da	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1		Although the word translated **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether men or women. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to men and women” or “to people” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
479	1CO	4	10	ds54	figs-ellipsis	ἡμεῖς μωροὶ διὰ Χριστόν, ὑμεῖς δὲ φρόνιμοι ἐν Χριστῷ; ἡμεῖς ἀσθενεῖς, ὑμεῖς δὲ ἰσχυροί; ὑμεῖς ἔνδοξοι, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἄτιμοι	1		In Paul’s language, he did not need to include the word translated **{are}**. However, many languages, including English, must add **{are}**, which is why the ULT includes it in brackets. If your language would not use **{are}** here, you could leave it unexpressed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
480	1CO	4	10	johq	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	-1		Here, the word **we** refers to Paul and the other “apostles.” It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
481	1CO	4	10	fkw2	figs-irony	ἡμεῖς μωροὶ…ἡμεῖς ἀσθενεῖς…ἡμεῖς…ἄτιμοι	1	We are fools … in dishonor	With these statements, Paul identifies what he and the other apostles are like from the perspective of this world. They are **fools**, **weak**, and **dishonored**. Paul does know that from God’s perspective they are actually “wise,” “strong,” and “honored.” However, he speaks from the perspective of this world to help the Corinthians change their thinking. Instead of wanting to be **wise**, **strong**, and **honored**, the Corinthians need to realize that following God will instead make them appear to this world as **fools**, **weak**, and **dishonored**. If the meaning of these statements would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clarifies that they are spoken from a different perspective. Alternate translation: “We {seem to be} fools … We {seem to be} weak … we {seem to be} dishonored” or “According to the world, we {are} fools … According to the word, we {are} weak … according to the world, we {are} dishonored’ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
482	1CO	4	10	ufj2	figs-irony	ὑμεῖς δὲ φρόνιμοι…ὑμεῖς δὲ ἰσχυροί…ὑμεῖς ἔνδοξοι	1		With these statements, Paul identifies what the Corinthians think about themselves. They think they are **wise**, **strong**, and **honored** from the perspective of this world. Paul contrasts what the Corinthians think about themselves and how he and other apostles look from the world’s perspective in order to make the Corinthians reconsider what they think about themselves. If these statements would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies that they are spoken from the perspective of the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “but you consider yourselves wise … but you consider yourselves strong … You consider yourselves honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
483	1CO	4	10	wqh7	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1	You are held in honor	Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains: (1) the means by which God has made the Corinthians **wise**. Alternate translation: “by means of your union with Christ” (2) the reason why God has made the Corinthians **wise**. Alternate translation: “because of your union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
484	1CO	4	10	d1s9	figs-infostructure	ὑμεῖς ἔνδοξοι, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἄτιμοι.	1		Paul changes the order of the last item in the list, putting **You** in front of **we**. In his culture, this is one way to identify the last item in a list. If the change in order would be misunderstood in your language, you could change the order to match the order Paul uses for the first two items. Alternate translation: “We {are} dishonored, but you {are} honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
485	1CO	4	11	i298	figs-idiom	ἄχρι τῆς ἄρτι ὥρας	1	Up to this present hour	In Paul’s culture, the phrase **Up to this present hour** means that what Paul is about to say has been happening and continues to happen up to the time when he writes this letter. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “To this very day” “All the time we serve Christ,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
486	1CO	4	11	k3f1	figs-exclusive	πεινῶμεν	1		Here, the word **we** refers to Paul and the other “apostles.” It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
487	1CO	4	11	hqco	translate-unknown	γυμνιτεύομεν	1		The word translated **are poorly clothed** means that the clothing is old and worn and barely covers a person’s body. If the meaning of **are poorly clothed** would be misunderstood in your language, use a word or phrase that identifies clothing that barely covers a person. Alternate translation: “are clothed in rags” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
488	1CO	4	11	jj2y	figs-activepassive	καὶ κολαφιζόμεθα, καὶ	1	we are brutally beaten	If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form with a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “, and people brutally beat us, and we” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
489	1CO	4	11	yhf4	translate-unknown	ἀστατοῦμεν	1	we are homeless	The word translated **are homeless** means that Paul and the other apostles do not have a permanent residence or a house that they own. It does not mean that they never had a place to stay. If the meaning of **are homeless** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that Paul and the other apostles do not have a permanent residence. Alternate translation: “do not own homes” or “are always on the move” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
490	1CO	4	12	exfo	figs-exclusive	ἰδίαις…εὐλογοῦμεν…ἀνεχόμεθα	1		Here, the words **our** and **we** refer to Paul and other “apostles.” They do not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
491	1CO	4	12	ushf	figs-doublet	κοπιῶμεν, ἐργαζόμενοι	1		Here, the words **working hard** and **working** mean basically the same thing. Paul uses both words to emphasize how **hard** he is working. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these words and indicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “are working very hard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
492	1CO	4	12	e0mz	figs-idiom	ἐργαζόμενοι ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσίν	1		In Paul’s culture, the phrase **with our own hands** indicates that Paul and other apostles were doing manual labor. In fact, we know that Paul himself made tents (see [Acts 18:3](../act/018/03.md)), so that is probably the manual labor which he refers to here. If **with our hands** would not refer to manual labor in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or an expression that refers to manual labor. Alternate translation: “doing physically demanding work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
493	1CO	4	12	z6fg	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	λοιδορούμενοι…διωκόμενοι	1		The phrases **Being reviled** and **being persecuted** identify the situations in which Paul and other apostles **bless** and **endure**. If this relationship would be misunderstood in your language, you could (1) include a word such as “when” to indicate that these actions happen at the same time. Alternate translation: “Any time we are reviled … any time we are persecuted” (2) include a word such as “although” to indicate that these actions are in contrast with each other. Alternate translation: “Although we are reviled … although we are persecuted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
494	1CO	4	12	n389	figs-activepassive	λοιδορούμενοι	1	When we are reviled, we bless	If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Others reviling us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
495	1CO	4	12	o7jz	translate-unknown	λοιδορούμενοι	1		Here, the word translated **Being reviled** refers to someone abusing another person with words. If that meaning for **Being reviled** would not be obvious in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does refer to using abusive words about another person. Alternate translation: “Being slandered” or “Being attacked verbally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
496	1CO	4	12	l71q	figs-explicit	εὐλογοῦμεν	1		Here, Paul does not state whom or what they **bless**. He could mean that they **bless**: (1) the people who “revile” them. Alternate translation: “we bless in return” (2) God, even though they are suffering. Alternate translation: “we bless God anyway” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
497	1CO	4	12	kue7	figs-activepassive	διωκόμενοι	1	When we are persecuted	If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Others persecuting us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
498	1CO	4	13	xvn4	figs-exclusive	παρακαλοῦμεν…ἐγενήθημεν	1		Here, the word **we** refers to Paul and other “apostles.” It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
499	1CO	4	13	l3ns	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	δυσφημούμενοι	1		The phrase **being slandered** identifies the situation in which Paul and other apostles **comfort**. If this relationship would be misunderstood in your language, you could (1) include a word such as “when” to indicate that these actions happen at the same time. Alternate translation: “Any time we are slandered” (2) include a word such as “although” to indicate that these actions are in contrast with each other. Alternate translation: “Although we are slandered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
500	1CO	4	13	a6hp	figs-activepassive	δυσφημούμενοι	1	When we are slandered	If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “others slandering us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
501	1CO	4	13	p0fd	figs-simile	ὡς περικαθάρματα τοῦ κόσμου ἐγενήθημεν, πάντων περίψημα	1		Here, Paul says that he and other apostles are like **scum** and **refuse**, both of which are words that describe garbage. Paul speaks in this way to show that **the world** considers him and other apostles to be worthless, just like garbage is worthless and should be thrown away. If the meaning of this simile would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable image or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “We have no value according to the world’s perspective” or “We have become like a heap of garbage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
502	1CO	4	13	uubg	figs-doublet	περικαθάρματα τοῦ κόσμου…πάντων περίψημα	1		Here, Paul uses two different words for garbage. The word **scum** refers to what people throw away after they clean something. The word **refuse** refers to dirt or filth that people wipe or scrub off an object. Paul uses two very similar words in order to emphasize that the world thinks that he and other apostles are like garbage. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “the filthy scum of all the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
503	1CO	4	13	gqxj	figs-possession	περικαθάρματα τοῦ κόσμου	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe what **the world** identifies as **scum**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a short phrase to clarify that **scum** is what **the world** thinks he and other apostles are. Alternate translation: “what the world considers scum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
504	1CO	4	13	flf9	figs-synecdoche	τοῦ κόσμου	1		When Paul uses **the world** in this context, he is not referring primarily to everything that God has made. Rather, he uses **the world** to refer to human beings who do not believe in Jesus. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that refers to human beings in general. Alternate translation: “of human beings” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche)
505	1CO	4	13	ip6p	figs-possession	πάντων περίψημα	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **refuse** that: (1) comes from **all things**. Alternate translation: “the refuse from all things” (2) **all** people consider to be garbage. Alternate translation: “what all people consider to be refuse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
506	1CO	4	13	z4tt	figs-idiom	ἕως ἄρτι	1		Here, Paul ends this sentence in a similar way to how he began his sentence in [4:11](../04/11.md). In Paul’s culture, the phrase **even until now** means that what Paul speaks about has been happening and continues to happen up to the time when he writes this letter. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “to this very day” “all the time we serve Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
507	1CO	4	14	k1at	figs-infostructure	οὐκ ἐντρέπων ὑμᾶς γράφω ταῦτα, ἀλλ’ ὡς τέκνα μου ἀγαπητὰ, νουθετῶ	1	I do not write these things to shame you, but to correct you	If putting the negative statement before the positive statement would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “I correct {you} as my beloved children. I do not write these things as shaming you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
508	1CO	4	14	r9pj	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἐντρέπων ὑμᾶς	1		Here, the phrase **as shaming you** introduces what Paul did **not write** to do. If **as shaming** would be understood as a purpose in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does clearly indicate purpose. Alternate translation: “in order to shame you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
509	1CO	4	14	nlzx	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1		The word translated **these things** refers back to what Paul has already written, focusing on [4:6–13](../04/06.md). If that meaning for **these things** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers back to what Paul has just finished writing. Alternate translation: “what I have said about us apostles and you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
510	1CO	4	14	t8jc	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὡς τέκνα μου ἀγαπητὰ	1	correct	Here, the phrase **as my beloved children** introduces (1) the reason why Paul corrects the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “because you are my beloved children” (2) the way in which he corrects the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “as a father corrects his beloved children, so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
511	1CO	4	14	ruu5	figs-metaphor	τέκνα μου ἀγαπητὰ	1	my beloved children	Here, Paul speaks of the Corinthians as if they were his **beloved children**. He speaks in this way because he is their spiritual father, the one who first preached the good news to them. Also, he loves them in the same way a father loves his own children. If Paul calling the Corinthians his **beloved children** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “my beloved younger siblings” or “fellow believers whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
512	1CO	4	15	ur1i	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ἐὰν…μυρίους παιδαγωγοὺς ἔχητε ἐν Χριστῷ	1		Here, Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that the Corinthians do not have **myriads of guardians**, but he speaks in this way to emphasize that they have only one spiritual father, no matter how many **guardians** they have. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “even if you somehow had myriads of guardians in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
513	1CO	4	15	n8c1	figs-hyperbole	μυρίους παιδαγωγοὺς	1	ten thousand guardians	Here, **myriads of guardians** is an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to mean a large number of **guardians**. If that would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a large number. Alternate translation: “many guardians” or “a large number of guardians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
514	1CO	4	15	nkcc	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1		Here, Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, identifies: (1) that these **guardians** are helping the Corinthians in their union with Christ. Alternate translation: “who work to unite you more strongly to Christ” (2) the guardians as fellow believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “who believe in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
515	1CO	4	15	d25x	figs-ellipsis	οὐ πολλοὺς πατέρας	1		Here, Paul omits some words that may be essential in your language to create a complete thought. In English, these words are essential, so they have been included in the ULT in brackets. If you can translate this sentence without these words, you could do so here. Otherwise, you could retain these words as they appear in the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
516	1CO	4	15	yij4		οὐ πολλοὺς πατέρας	1		Alternate translation: “{you would have} only one father”
517	1CO	4	15	j01t	figs-exmetaphor	οὐ πολλοὺς πατέρας; ἐν γὰρ Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, ἐγὼ ὑμᾶς ἐγέννησα.	1		Here, Paul speaks of himself as a “father” to the Corinthian believers. He became their father **through the gospel**, which means that he is their spiritual father. He is the one who preached the **gospel** to them when they became united to **Christ Jesus**, and that makes him the one who **fathered** them. If how Paul speaks about **fathers** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that Paul refers to “spiritual” **fathers**. Alternate translation: “{you would} not {have} many spiritual fathers; for I fathered you spiritually in Christ Jesus through the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
518	1CO	4	15	m9ek	figs-metaphor	ἐν…Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	2	I became your father in Christ Jesus through the gospel	Here, Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ Jesus** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains: (1) that the Corinthians became united to Christ when Paul preached the good news to them. Alternate translation: “when you were united to Christ Jesus” (2) Paul is their father in the Christian family, the family that is united to Christ. Alternate translation: “in the Christian family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
519	1CO	4	17	hi7w		ὅς ἐστίν μου τέκνον, ἀγαπητὸν καὶ πιστὸν ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	my beloved and faithful child in the Lord	“whom I love and whom I teach about the Lord as if he were my own child”
520	1CO	4	18	v4fn		δέ	1	Now	**Now** indicates that Paul is shifting his topic to rebuking the arrogant behavior of the Corinthian believers.
521	1CO	4	19	jdk5		ἐλεύσομαι…πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	I will come to you	“I will visit you”
522	1CO	4	21	ix5g	figs-rquestion	τί θέλετε?	1	What do you want?	Paul was making a last appeal to the Corinthians, as he has been rebuking them for the errors they had made. Alternate translation: “Tell me what you want to happen now.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
523	1CO	4	21	wv61	figs-rquestion	ἐν ῥάβδῳ ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ἢ ἐν ἀγάπῃ, πνεύματί τε πραΰτητος?	1	Shall I come to you with a rod or with love and in a spirit of gentleness?	Paul is offering the Corinthians two opposing attitudes he could use when approaching them. Alternate translation: “If you want, I can come to punish you, or I can come to show you how much I love you by being gentle with you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
524	1CO	4	21	ix7l		πραΰτητος	1	of gentleness	“of kindness” or “of tenderness”
525	1CO	5	intro	vb3l			0		# 1 Corinthians 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 13.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Euphemisms<br><br>Paul uses euphemisms to describe sensitive topics. This chapter deals with sexual immorality of one church member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fornication]])<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>Paul uses an extended comparison using many metaphors. Yeast represents evil. The loaf probably represents the whole congregation. The unleavened bread represents living purely. So the whole passage means: Don’t you know that a little evil will affect the whole congregation? So get rid of the evil so you can live purely. Christ has been sacrificed for us. So let us be sincere and truthful and not wicked and behaving badly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/unleavenedbread]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/purify]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
526	1CO	5	1	e66c			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul now specifically states about what sin of theirs he has heard, and how the Corinthian believers are proud of their acceptance of that man and his sin.
527	1CO	5	1	dlj2	figs-activepassive	ἥτις οὐδὲ ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	which does not even exist among the Gentiles	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that not even the Gentiles permit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
528	1CO	5	1	b9xn		γυναῖκά τινα τοῦ πατρὸς ἔχειν	1	a man has his father’s wife	“a man among you is committing adultery with his father’s wife”
529	1CO	5	1	lxp1		γυναῖκά…πατρὸς	1	father’s wife	the wife of his father, but probably not his own mother
530	1CO	5	2	rr93	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ἀρθῇ ἐκ μέσου ὑμῶν ὁ, τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο ποιήσας	1	The one who did this must be removed from among you	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and remove the one who did this from among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
531	1CO	5	3	xm4e		παρὼν…τῷ πνεύματι	1	I am present in spirit	Being with them **in spirit** represents caring about them or wanting to be with them. Alternate translation: “I care about you” or “I want to be with you”
532	1CO	5	3	ax3u		ἤδη κέκρικα…τὸν οὕτως τοῦτο κατεργασάμενον	1	I have already passed judgment on the one who did this	This could mean: (1) Paul has decided what they should do with the one who did this. (2) Paul has found the person who did this guilty.
533	1CO	5	4	m9yz		συναχθέντων ὑμῶν	1	When you are assembled	“When you are together” or “When you meet together”
534	1CO	5	4	t83d	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ	1	in the name of our Lord Jesus	This could mean: (1) the **name** of the Lord Jesus is a metonym that represents his authority. Alternate translation: “with the authority of our Lord Jesus” (2) being assembled in the Lord’s **name** implies meeting together to worship him. Alternate translation: “to worship our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
535	1CO	5	5	xcf6	figs-metaphor	παραδοῦναι τὸν τοιοῦτον τῷ Σατανᾷ	1	hand this man over to Satan	To **hand the man over to Satan** represents not allowing the man to be part of their group so that Satan would be allowed to harm him. Alternate translation: “make this man leave your group so that Satan can harm him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
536	1CO	5	5	nq4y	figs-metaphor	εἰς ὄλεθρον τῆς σαρκός	1	for the destruction of the flesh	Here, **flesh** could be: (1) a reference to his physical body. Alternate translation: “so that Satan may harm his body” (2) a metaphor for the sinful nature. Alternate translation: “so that his sinful nature will be destroyed” or “so that he will not continue to live according to his sinful nature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
537	1CO	5	5	z2cl	figs-activepassive	ἵνα τὸ πνεῦμα σωθῇ ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	so that his spirit may be saved on the day of the Lord	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so that God may save his spirit on the day of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
538	1CO	5	6	h2hk		οὐ καλὸν τὸ καύχημα ὑμῶν	1	Your boasting is not good	“Your boasting is bad”
539	1CO	5	6	n9w0	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι μικρὰ ζύμη, ὅλον τὸ φύραμα ζυμοῖ?	1		You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should know that a little yeast will affect the whole loaf!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
540	1CO	5	6	ng4m	figs-metaphor	μικρὰ ζύμη, ὅλον τὸ φύραμα ζυμοῖ	1	Do you not know that a little yeast leavens the whole loaf?	Just as a little yeast spreads throughout a whole loaf of bread, so can a little sin impact the entire fellowship of believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
541	1CO	5	7	ret3	figs-metaphor	καὶ…τὸ Πάσχα ἡμῶν ἐτύθη, Χριστός	1	Christ, our Passover lamb, has been sacrificed	As the Passover lamb covered the sins of Israel by faith each year, so did Christ’s death cover the sins of all who trust in Christ by faith for eternity. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
542	1CO	5	7	yzjl	figs-activepassive	καὶ…τὸ Πάσχα ἡμῶν ἐτύθη, Χριστός	1		You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord has also sacrificed Christ, our Passover lamb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
543	1CO	5	10	taf5		τοῖς πλεονέκταις	1	the greedy	“those who are greedy” or “those who are willing to be dishonest to get what others have”
544	1CO	5	10	hu63		ἅρπαξιν	1	swindlers	people who cheat to get others’ property
545	1CO	5	10	m59j		ὠφείλετε…ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου ἐξελθεῖν	1	you would need to go out of the world	“you would need to avoid every person”
546	1CO	5	11	wcm2			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul tells them how to treat believers in the church who refuse to be corrected for their involvement in sexual immorality and other obvious sins before others.
547	1CO	5	11	w9w8	figs-activepassive	τις…ὀνομαζόμενος	1	anyone who is called	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “anyone who calls himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
548	1CO	5	11	b4us		ἀδελφὸς	1	brother	Here, **brother** means a fellow Christian, either a man or a woman.
549	1CO	5	12	xeu7	figs-rquestion	τί…μοι τοὺς ἔξω κρίνειν?	1	how am I involved with judging those who are outside the church?	Paul is emphasizing that he is not the one **to judge** people outside the church. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I am not the one who should judge people who do not belong to the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
550	1CO	5	12	m4s6	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ τοὺς ἔσω ὑμεῖς κρίνετε?	1	Are you not to judge those inside?	Paul is scolding the Corinthians. “You should know that you are the ones who should judge those who are inside the church.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
551	1CO	6	intro	s6hb			0		# 1 Corinthians 6 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Lawsuits<br><br>Paul teaches that a Christian should not take another Christian to court before a non-Christian judge. It is better to be cheated. Christians will judge the angels. So they should be able to solve problems among themselves. It is especially bad to use a court to cheat another believer. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>The temple of the Holy Spirit is an important metaphor. It refers to the place where the Holy Spirit stays and is worshiped. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
552	1CO	6	1	hv79			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul then explains how believers are to settle disagreements with other believers.
553	1CO	6	1	q5d3		πρᾶγμα	1	dispute	a disagreement or argument
554	1CO	6	1	gmy5	figs-rquestion	τολμᾷ τις ὑμῶν, πρᾶγμα ἔχων πρὸς τὸν ἕτερον, κρίνεσθαι ἐπὶ τῶν ἀδίκων, καὶ οὐχὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἁγίων?	1	does he dare to go … saints?	Paul is emphasizing that Christians must resolve disagreements among themselves. Alternate translation: “None of you should dare, having a dispute with another, to go to court before the unrighteous, and not before the saints!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
555	1CO	6	2	i1m5	figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι οἱ ἅγιοι τὸν κόσμον κρινοῦσιν?	1	Or do you not know that the believers will judge the world?	Paul is shaming the Corinthians for acting like they do not know. Alternate translation: “You should know that the saints will judge the world!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
556	1CO	6	2	i67f	figs-rquestion	καὶ εἰ ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος, ἀνάξιοί ἐστε κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων?	1	If then, you will judge the world, are you not able to settle matters of little importance?	Because they will be given greater responsibility later, they should be responsible for lesser things now. Alternate translation: “And you will judge the world in the future, so you should be able to settle this matter now.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
557	1CO	6	3	h374		βιωτικά	1	matters of this life	“things that only have to do with this life”
558	1CO	6	3	us55	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ἀγγέλους κρινοῦμεν, μήτι γε βιωτικά?	1	Do you not know that we will judge the angels?	Paul is surprised that they do not seem to know. Alternate translation: “You should know that we will judge the angels. So of course you should be able to judge matters of this life!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
559	1CO	6	3	v5r5	figs-exclusive	κρινοῦμεν	1	we will judge	Here, **we** includes Paul and the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
560	1CO	6	3	x6h3	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ἀγγέλους κρινοῦμεν, μήτι γε βιωτικά?	1	How much more, then, can we judge matters of this life?	Because they will be given greater responsibility later, they should be responsible for lesser things now. Alternate translation: “Because we know we will judge the angels, we can also be sure that God will enable us to judge matters in this life.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
561	1CO	6	4	vw5t	figs-rquestion	βιωτικὰ μὲν οὖν κριτήρια ἐὰν ἔχητε, τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, τούτους καθίζετε?	1	If then you have to make judgments that pertain to daily life, why do you lay such cases as these before those who have no standing in the church?	This could be: (1) a rhetorical question. (2) a statement, “When in the past you have settled matters that are important in this life, you have not handed off disputes between Christians to be settled by unbelievers.” (3) a command, “When you settle matters that are important in this life, it is even to those who have no standing in the church that you should hand off disputes to be settled!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
562	1CO	6	4	xn32		βιωτικὰ…κριτήρια ἐὰν ἔχητε	1	If then you have to make judgments that pertain to daily life	“if you are called upon to make decisions about daily life” or “if you must settle matters that are important in this life”
563	1CO	6	4	e791	figs-rquestion	τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, τούτους καθίζετε?	1	why do you lay such cases as these before those who have no standing in the church?	Paul is rebuking the Corinthians for how they are handling these cases. This could mean: (1) they should stop giving such cases to people who are outside the church. (2) they should give such cases even to members of the church who are not well regarded by other believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
564	1CO	6	5	fue4	figs-rquestion	πρὸς ἐντροπὴν ὑμῖν λέγω. οὕτως οὐκ ἔνι ἐν ὑμῖν οὐδεὶς σοφὸς, ὃς δυνήσεται διακρῖναι ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ?	1	Is there no one among you wise enough to settle a dispute between brothers?	Paul is shaming the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “You should be ashamed that you cannot find a wise believer among you to settle arguments between believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
565	1CO	6	5	b2vy		πρὸς ἐντροπὴν ὑμῖν	1	to your shame	“to your dishonor” or “to show how you have failed in this matter”
566	1CO	6	5	l1hd		τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ	1	brothers	Here, **brothers** refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.
567	1CO	6	6	m7ls	figs-rquestion	ἀλλὰ ἀδελφὸς μετὰ ἀδελφοῦ κρίνεται, καὶ τοῦτο ἐπὶ ἀπίστων?	1	But brother goes to court against brother, and this before unbelievers!	You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “But believers who have disputes with each other ask unbelieving judges to make decisions for them!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
568	1CO	6	7	tn9m	figs-rquestion	διὰ τί οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἀδικεῖσθε? διὰ τί οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἀποστερεῖσθε?	1	Why not rather suffer the wrong? Why not rather allow yourselves to be cheated?	Paul continues to shame the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “It would be better to let others wrong you and cheat you than to take them to court.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
569	1CO	6	8	kk7b		ἀδελφούς	1	your own brothers	Here, **brothers** refers to all believers, both men and women. Alternate translation: “your own fellow believers”
570	1CO	6	9	h17l	figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ἄδικοι Θεοῦ Βασιλείαν οὐ κληρονομήσουσιν?	1	Or do you not know that	Paul emphasizes that they should already know this truth. Alternate translation: “You already know that he unrighteous will not inherit the kingdom of God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
571	1CO	6	9	t1rt	figs-metaphor	κληρονομήσουσιν	1	will inherit	Receiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
572	1CO	6	9	h2na	figs-merism	μαλακοὶ…ἀρσενοκοῖται	1	male prostitutes, those who practice homosexuality	These phrases could be: (1) a merism for all homosexual activity. (2) two different activities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
573	1CO	6	9	blc7		μαλακοὶ…ἀρσενοκοῖται	1	male prostitutes	These phrases could refer to: (1) men who allow other men to sleep with them. (2) men who allow men who pay them to sleep with them. (3) men who allow other men to sleep with them as part of a religious activity.
574	1CO	6	10	bgj9		πλεονέκται	1	the greedy	people who are willing to use evil means to take others’ property
575	1CO	6	11	v5yq	figs-activepassive	ἀπελούσασθε	1	you have been cleansed	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has cleansed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
576	1CO	6	11	u8kl	figs-activepassive	ἡγιάσθητε	1	you have been sanctified	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God set you apart for himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
577	1CO	6	11	gnr6	figs-activepassive	ἐδικαιώθητε	1	you were justified	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God made you right with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
578	1CO	6	11	s55x	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	in the name of the Lord Jesus Christ	Here, **name** is a metonym for the power and authority of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “by the power and authority of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
579	1CO	6	12	sw2e			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul reminds the Corinthian believers that God wants them pure because Christ has bought them with his death. Their bodies are now God’s temple. He does so by saying what the Corinthians might say and then correcting them.
580	1CO	6	12	r4mx		πάντα μοι ἔξεστιν	1	Everything is lawful for me	This could mean: (1) Paul is actually saying what he thinks is true, “God allows me to do anything.” (2) Paul is answering what some Corinthians might be thinking, “Some say, ‘I can do anything’.”
581	1CO	6	12	c8vz	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐγὼ ἐξουσιασθήσομαι ὑπό τινος	1	I will not be mastered by any of them	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I will not allow these things to rule over me like a master” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
582	1CO	6	13	jz55		τὰ βρώματα τῇ κοιλίᾳ, καὶ ἡ κοιλία τοῖς βρώμασιν; ὁ δὲ Θεὸς καὶ ταύτην καὶ ταῦτα καταργήσει	1	“Food is for the stomach, and the stomach is for food,” but God will do away with both of them	This could mean: (1) Paul is correcting what some Corinthians might be thinking, “food is for the stomach, and the stomach is for food,” by answering that God will do away with both the stomach and food. (2) Paul actually agrees that “food is for the stomach, and the stomach is for food,” but he is adding that God will do away with both of them.
583	1CO	6	13	uc1v		καταργήσει	1	do away with	“destroy”
584	1CO	6	14	ev9l		τὸν Κύριον ἤγειρεν	1	raised the Lord	“caused the Lord to live again”
585	1CO	6	15	gt2x	figs-metaphor	οὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν μέλη Χριστοῦ ἐστιν?	1	Do you not know that your bodies are members of Christ?	The word translated as **members** refers to parts of a body. Our belonging to Christ is spoken of as if we were parts of his body. We belong to him so much that even our bodies belong to him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
586	1CO	6	15	io5p	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν μέλη Χριστοῦ ἐστιν?	1		Paul uses this question to remind the people of something they should already know. Alternate translation: “You should know that your bodies are part of the body of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
587	1CO	6	15	f4vd	figs-rquestion	ἄρας οὖν τὰ μέλη τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ποιήσω πόρνης μέλη? μὴ γένοιτο!	1	Shall I then take away the members of Christ and join them to a prostitute? May it not be!	Paul uses this question to emphasize how wrong it is for someone who belongs to Christ to go to a prostitute. Alternate translation: “I am part of Christ. I will not take my body and join myself to a prostitute!” or “We are parts of Christ’s body. We must not take our bodies and join ourselves to prostitutes!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
588	1CO	6	15	kmt2		μὴ γένοιτο	1	May it not be!	“That should never happen!” or “We must never do that!”
589	1CO	6	16	seg6	figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ὁ κολλώμενος τῇ πόρνῃ, ἓν σῶμά ἐστιν?	1	Do you not know that … her?	Paul begins to teach the Corinthians by emphasizing a truth that they already know. “I want to remind you the one who is joined to the prostitute is one body with her.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
590	1CO	6	16	z54k	figs-activepassive	ὁ κολλώμενος τῇ πόρνῃ, ἓν σῶμά ἐστιν	1	he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one flesh with her	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when a man joins his body to the body of a prostitute, it is as if their bodies become one body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
591	1CO	6	17	c2tb	figs-activepassive	ὁ…κολλώμενος τῷ Κυρίῳ, ἓν πνεῦμά ἐστιν	1	he who is joined to the Lord becomes one spirit with him	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the Lord joins his spirit to the spirit of a person, it is as if their spirits become one spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
592	1CO	6	18	ex92	figs-metaphor	φεύγετε τὴν πορνείαν	1	Flee from	Paul speaks of a person rejecting sexual sin as if that person were running away from danger. Alternate translation: “Get away from sexual sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
593	1CO	6	18	sc9d	figs-explicit	πᾶν ἁμάρτημα ὃ ἐὰν ποιήσῃ ἄνθρωπος ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματός ἐστιν, ὁ δὲ πορνεύων εἰς τὸ ἴδιον σῶμα ἁμαρτάνει	1	immorality! Every other sin that a person commits is outside the body, but	This could mean: (1) Paul is showing that sexual sin is especially bad because it is not only against others but against the sinner’s own body. (2) Paul is quoting what some Corinthians were thinking. Alternate translation: “immorality! Some of you are saying, ‘Every sin that a person commits is outside the body,’ but I say that the one who is sexually immoral sins against his own body.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
594	1CO	6	18	jr46		ἁμάρτημα ὃ ἐὰν ποιήσῃ ἄνθρωπος	1	sin that a person commits	“evil deed that a person does”
595	1CO	6	19	qy5j	figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι τὸ σῶμα ὑμῶν, ναὸς τοῦ ἐν ὑμῖν Ἁγίου Πνεύματός ἐστιν, οὗ ἔχετε ἀπὸ Θεοῦ?	1	Do you not know … God? … that you are not your own?	Paul is continuing to teach the Corinthians by emphasizing what they already know. Alternate translation: “I want to remind you that your body is a temple of the Holy Spirit in you, whom you have from God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
596	1CO	6	19	bb35		τὸ σῶμα ὑμῶν	1	your body	the **body** of each individual Christian
597	1CO	6	19	d2mc	figs-metaphor	ναὸς τοῦ…Ἁγίου Πνεύματός	1	temple of the Holy Spirit	A **temple** is dedicated to divine beings, and it is also where they dwell. In the same way, each Corinthian believer’s body is like a temple because the Holy Spirit is present within them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
598	1CO	6	20	qv47	figs-activepassive	ἠγοράσθητε γὰρ τιμῆς	1	For you were bought with a price	God paid for the freedom of the Corinthians from the slavery of sin. You can state this as active. Alternate translation: “for God paid for your freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
599	1CO	6	20	y7fe		δὴ	1	Therefore	“Because what I have just said is true”
600	1CO	7	intro	a25m			0		# 1 Corinthians 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul begins to answer a series of questions that the Corinthians may have asked him. The first question is about marriage. The second question is about a slave trying to become free, a Gentile becoming a Jew, or a Jew becoming a Gentile.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Divorce<br><br>Paul says married Christians should not divorce. A Christian married to an unbeliever should not leave their husband or wife. If the unbelieving husband or wife leaves, this is not a sin. Paul advises that, because of the difficult times and being near to time that Jesus will return, it is acceptable to remain unmarried. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Euphemisms<br><br>Paul uses many euphemisms to discreetly refer to sexual relations. This is often a sensitive topic. Many cultures do not wish to speak openly about these matters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
601	1CO	7	1	iue7			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul gives the believers some specific instructions on marriage.
602	1CO	7	1	y4lx		δὲ	1	Now	Paul is introducing a new topic in his teaching.
603	1CO	7	1	jq21		ὧν ἐγράψατε	1	the issues you wrote about	The Corinthians had written a letter to Paul to ask for answers to certain questions.
604	1CO	7	1	erl5		καλὸν ἀνθρώπῳ, γυναικὸς μὴ ἅπτεσθαι	1	“It is good for a man not to touch a woman.”	This could mean: (1) Paul is quoting what the Corinthians had written. Alternate translation: “you wrote, ‘It is good for a man not to touch a woman.’” (2) Paul is saying what he really thinks. Alternate translation: “my answer is that yes, it is good for a man not to touch a woman.”
605	1CO	7	1	ui5c		καλὸν	1	It is good	“It is most helpful”
606	1CO	7	1	cm7y		ἀνθρώπῳ	1	for a man	Here, **a man** could refer to: (1) a married man. Alternate translation: “a husband” (2) any man.
607	1CO	7	1	mx7w	figs-euphemism	γυναικὸς μὴ ἅπτεσθαι	1	not to touch a woman	Here, **touch a woman** is a euphemism for having sexual relations, upon which Paul elaborates in verses 3-5. However, it is also clear from verse 2 that Paul is specifically talking about sexual relations between a husband and his wife. Alternate translation: “not to have sexual relations with his wife for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
608	1CO	7	2	c3uq		διὰ δὲ	1	But because	This could mean: (1) Paul is responding to what the Corinthians had written. Alternate translation: “That is true, but because” (2) Paul is saying what he really thinks.
609	1CO	7	2	fys4		διὰ δὲ τὰς πορνείας	1	But because of temptations for many immoral acts, each	“But because Satan tempts people to commit sexual sin” or “But we desire to commit sexual sin because of our sinful nature”
610	1CO	7	3	mj8l	figs-euphemism	ὀφειλὴν	1	sexual rights	Both husbands and wives are obligated to regularly have sexual relations with their spouses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
611	1CO	7	3	vhv1	figs-ellipsis	ὁμοίως…καὶ ἡ γυνὴ τῷ ἀνδρί	1	likewise the wife to her husband	The words “should give” and “sexual rights” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “likewise the wife should give to her husband his sexual rights” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
612	1CO	7	5	qq7u	figs-explicit	μὴ ἀποστερεῖτε ἀλλήλους	1	Do not deprive each other	The word **deprive** means to keep from someone something that the other person has the right to receive. “Do not refuse to have marital relations with your spouse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
613	1CO	7	5	uq6x		ἵνα σχολάσητε τῇ προσευχῇ	1	so that you may devote yourselves to prayer	in order to have a period of especially deep prayer
614	1CO	7	5	s1ya		πάλιν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ἦτε	1	come together again	“sleep together again”
615	1CO	7	5	ii8n		διὰ τὴν ἀκρασίαν ὑμῶν	1	because of your lack of self-control	“because after some days, your sexual desires will be harder to keep under control”
616	1CO	7	6	xe7r		τοῦτο δὲ λέγω κατὰ συνγνώμην, οὐ κατ’ ἐπιταγήν	1	I say these things to you as a concession and not as a command	This could mean: (1) Paul is telling the Corinthians that he is allowing them, but not commanding them, to marry and sleep together. (2) Paul is telling the Corinthians that he is allowing them, but not commanding them, to stop sleeping together for a time.
617	1CO	7	7	rbe7		εἶναι ὡς καὶ ἐμαυτόν	1	were as I am	Either Paul had never married or his wife had died. It is unlikely that he had been through a divorce.
618	1CO	7	7	w9ld		ἀλλὰ ἕκαστος ἴδιον ἔχει χάρισμα ἐκ Θεοῦ; ὁ μὲν οὕτως, ὁ δὲ οὕτως	1	But each one has his own gift from God. One has this kind of gift, and another that kind	“God enables people to do different things. He enables one person to do one thing and another person to do something different”
619	1CO	7	8	r27x		καλὸν	1	it is good	See how you translated **good** in [1 Corinthians 7:1](../07/01.md).
620	1CO	7	9	ty79		πυροῦσθαι	1	to burn with desire	“to live with the constant desire to sleep with someone”
621	1CO	7	10	hc5p		ἀπὸ…μὴ χωρισθῆναι	1	should not separate from	Paul’s readers knew no difference between separating and divorcing. To stop living with someone was to end the marriage. Alternate translation: “should not divorce”
622	1CO	7	11	lxf7	figs-activepassive	τῷ ἀνδρὶ καταλλαγήτω	1	be reconciled to her husband	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “she should make peace with her husband and return to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
623	1CO	7	11	jd5w		μὴ ἀφιέναι	1	should not divorce	Paul’s readers knew no difference between divorcing and simply separating. To do either was to end the marriage. Alternate translation: “should not separate from”
624	1CO	7	12	k9yd		συνευδοκεῖ	1	agrees	“is willing” or “is satisfied”
625	1CO	7	13	mw6k		ἄνδρα	1	husband	The word translated as **husband** is the same Greek word as for “man.”
626	1CO	7	14	l84p	figs-activepassive	ἡγίασται γὰρ ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ ἄπιστος ἐν τῇ γυναικί	1	For the unbelieving husband is set apart because of his wife	This could mean: (1) God has set apart the unbelieving husband for himself because of his believing wife. (2) God treats the unbelieving husband as he would treat a son for the sake of his believing wife. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
627	1CO	7	14	w5y9	figs-activepassive	ἡγίασται ἡ γυνὴ ἡ ἄπιστος ἐν τῷ ἀδελφῷ	1	the unbelieving wife is set apart because of the brother	This could mean: (1) God has set apart the unbelieving wife for himself because of her husband who believes. (2) God treats the unbelieving wife as he would treat a daughter for the sake of her husband who believes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
628	1CO	7	14	i1x4		τῷ ἀδελφῷ	1	the brother	the believing husband
629	1CO	7	14	fmu5	figs-activepassive	ἅγιά ἐστιν	1	they are set apart	This could mean: (1) God has set them apart for himself. (2) God treats them as he would treat his own children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
630	1CO	7	15	jef4	figs-metaphor	οὐ δεδούλωται ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἡ ἀδελφὴ ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις	1	In such cases, the brother or sister is not bound to their vows	Here, **brother** and **sister** refers to a Christian husband or wife. Here, **not bound to their vows** is a metaphor that mean the person is not obligated to do what they vowed to do. Alternate translation: “In such cases, the believing spouse is not obligated to continue to obey the marriage vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
631	1CO	7	15	q6k2	figs-activepassive	οὐ δεδούλωται ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἡ ἀδελφὴ ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις	1		You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “In such cases, God does not require the believing spouse to continue to obey the marriage vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
632	1CO	7	16	l559	figs-you	οἶδας, γύναι…τὸν ἄνδρα σώσεις…οἶδας, ἄνερ…τὴν γυναῖκα σώσεις	1	do you know, woman … you will save your husband … do you know, man … you will save your wife	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so all instances of **you** and **your** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
633	1CO	7	16	h5td	figs-rquestion	τί γὰρ οἶδας, γύναι, εἰ τὸν ἄνδρα σώσεις?	1	how do you know, woman, whether you will save your husband?	Paul uses a question to cause women to think deeply about what he is saying. Alternate translation: “For you cannot know if you will save your unbelieving husband.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
634	1CO	7	16	dbz6	figs-rquestion	ἢ τί οἶδας, ἄνερ, εἰ τὴν γυναῖκα σώσεις?	1	how do you know, man, whether you will save your wife?	Paul uses a question to cause men to think deeply about what he is saying. Alternate translation: “And you cannot know if you will save your unbelieving wife.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
635	1CO	7	17	ya76		ἑκάστῳ	1	each one	“to each believer”
636	1CO	7	17	iid2		οὕτως ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις πάσαις διατάσσομαι	1	I direct in this way in all the churches	Paul was teaching believers **in all the churches** to act in this manner.
637	1CO	7	18	unc4	figs-rquestion	περιτετμημένος τις ἐκλήθη?	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	Paul was addressing the circumcised ones (the Jews). Alternate translation: “I am now speaking to the circumcised ones who had already been circumcised when God called you to believe.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
638	1CO	7	18	fqv6	figs-rquestion	ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ κέκληταί τις?	1	Was anyone called in uncircumcision?	Paul was now addressing the uncircumcised ones. Alternate translation: “I am now speaking to the uncircumcised ones who had not been circumcised when God called you to believe.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
639	1CO	7	20	yy8l	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the words **us** and **we** refer to all Christians and include Paul’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
640	1CO	7	20	hsz1		ἐν τῇ κλήσει ᾗ ἐκλήθη, ἐν ταύτῃ μενέτω	1	in the calling … he should remain	Here, **calling** refers to the work or social position in which you were involved. Alternate translation: “live and work in the same condition as when God called you to believe”
641	1CO	7	21	ag5a	figs-you	ἐκλήθης…σοι…δύνασαι	1	Were you … called you? Do not be … you can become	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so all instances of **you** and the command **be** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
642	1CO	7	21	nli9	figs-rquestion	δοῦλος ἐκλήθης? μή σοι μελέτω	1	Were you a slave when God called you? Do not be concerned	You can state this as a statement. Alternate translation: “To those who were slaves when God called you to believe, I say this: do not be concerned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
643	1CO	7	22	l6vq		ἀπελεύθερος Κυρίου	1	the Lord’s freeman	This **freedman** is forgiven by God and therefore free from Satan and sin.
644	1CO	7	23	m53p	figs-activepassive	τιμῆς ἠγοράσθητε	1	You have been bought with a price	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Christ bought you by dying for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
645	1CO	7	24	qu1l		ἀδελφοί	1	Brothers	Here, **brothers** refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.
646	1CO	7	24	c83e	figs-activepassive	ἐκλήθη	1	was called	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he was when God called him to believe in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
647	1CO	7	25	f71a		περὶ δὲ τῶν παρθένων, ἐπιταγὴν Κυρίου οὐκ ἔχω	1	Now concerning those who never married, I have no commandment from the Lord	Paul knows no teaching of Jesus that speaks about this situation. Alternate translation: “The Lord has not commanded me to say anything to people who have never married”
648	1CO	7	25	vaa4		γνώμην…δίδωμι	1	I give my opinion	“I tell you what I think”
649	1CO	7	25	qqz7		ὡς ἠλεημένος ὑπὸ Κυρίου, πιστὸς εἶναι	1	as one who, by the Lord’s mercy, is trustworthy	“because, by the Lord’s mercy, I am trustworthy”
650	1CO	7	27	a77x	figs-you		0	General Information:	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if he were speaking to each person, so all these instances of “you” and the command “do not seek” here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
651	1CO	7	27	k9td	figs-rquestion	δέδεσαι γυναικί? μὴ ζήτει	1	Are you married to a wife? Do not	Paul uses this question to introduce a possible condition. You can translate the question as a phrase with “if.” Alternate translation: “If you are married, do not seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
652	1CO	7	27	x2lk		μὴ ζήτει λύσιν	1	Do not seek a divorce	“Do not try to divorce her” or “Do not separate from her”
653	1CO	7	27	d79c		μὴ ζήτει…γυναῖκα	2	do not seek a wife	“Do not try to get married”
654	1CO	7	28	whf5	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ…ὑμῶν φείδομαι	1	I want to spare you from this	The word **this** refers to the kinds of worldly trouble that married people might have. Alternate translation: “I want to help you not to have worldly trouble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
655	1CO	7	29	r594		ὁ καιρὸς συνεσταλμένος ἐστίν	1	The time is short	“There is little time” or “Time is almost gone”
656	1CO	7	30	vm8k		οἱ κλαίοντες	1	those who weep	people who cry or grieve with tears
657	1CO	7	31	t41v		οἱ χρώμενοι τὸν κόσμον	1	those using the world	“those who deal every day with unbelievers”
658	1CO	7	31	jl2r		ὡς μὴ καταχρώμενοι	1	as though they were not using it	“should show by their actions that they have their hope in God”
659	1CO	7	32	t4ab	figs-idiom	ἀμερίμνους	1	free from worries	Here, **free** is an idiom which means the ability to live without constantly thinking about.” Alternate translation: “without needing to worry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
660	1CO	7	32	d4zd		μεριμνᾷ	1	concerned about	“is focused on”
661	1CO	7	34	ug6n		ἡ δὲ γαμήσασα μεριμνᾷ τὰ τοῦ κόσμου, πῶς ἀρέσῃ τῷ ἀνδρί	1	is concerned about	“But the married woman is trying to please God and please her husband at the same time”
662	1CO	7	35	rp3w		βρόχον	1	constraint	any restriction
663	1CO	7	35	ffx4		εὐπάρεδρον τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	devoted	“can concentrate on the Lord”
664	1CO	7	36	jn8j		ἀσχημονεῖν ἐπὶ	1	he is acting improperly toward	“his is not being kind to” or “his is not honoring”
665	1CO	7	36	crb8		τὴν παρθένον αὐτοῦ	1	his virgin	Here, **his virgin** could refer to: (1) the woman whom he promised to marry. (2) his virgin daughter.
666	1CO	7	36	wdj5		γαμείτωσαν	1	let them marry	This could mean: (1) he should marry his fiancée. (2) he should let his daughter get married.
667	1CO	7	37	nm99	figs-metaphor	ὃς δὲ ἕστηκεν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ ἑδραῖος	1	But if he is standing firm in his heart	Here, **standing firm** is a metaphor for deciding something with certainty. Alternate translation: “But if he has decided firmly in his own heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
668	1CO	7	37	uthl	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **heart** is metonym for a person’s mind or thoughts. Alternate translation: “in his own mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
669	1CO	7	39	d413	figs-metaphor	γυνὴ δέδεται ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ ὁ ἀνὴρ αὐτῆς	1	A wife is bound for as long as her husband lives	Here, **bound** is a metaphor for a close relationship between people in which they support each other emotionally, spiritually, and physically. Here it means the union of marriage. Alternate translation: “A woman is married to her husband” or “A woman is united with her husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
670	1CO	7	39	ms7z		ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ ὁ ἀνὴρ αὐτῆς	1	for as long as … lives	“until her husband dies”
671	1CO	7	39	y6rz		ᾧ θέλει	1	whomever she wishes	“anyone she wants”
672	1CO	7	39	rr2d		ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	in the Lord	“if the new husband is a believer”
673	1CO	7	40	hwz4		τὴν ἐμὴν γνώμην	1	my judgment	“my understanding of God’s word”
674	1CO	7	40	hd7f		μακαριωτέρα	1	happier	more contented, more joyful
675	1CO	7	40	pse4		οὕτως μείνῃ	1	lives as she is	“if she would remain unmarried”
676	1CO	8	intro	c8l6			0		# 1 Corinthians 8 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In Chapters 8-10, Paul answers the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?”<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Meat sacrificed to idols<br><br>Paul answers this question by saying that idols are gods that do not really exist. Therefore nothing is wrong with the meat. Christians are free to eat it. However, someone who does not understand this may see a Christian eating it. They may then be encouraged to eat the meat as an act of worship to the idol.
677	1CO	8	1	jf6h	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	**We** and **we** refer to Paul and, though specifically writing to the Corinthian believers, include all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
678	1CO	8	1	nzt4			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul reminds the believers that though idols have no power, believers must be careful not to affect the weaker believers who might think they care about the idols. He tells believers to be careful with the liberty believers have in Christ.
679	1CO	8	1	cep1		περὶ δὲ	1	Now about	Paul uses the phrase **Now about** to move on to the next question the Corinthians had asked him.
680	1CO	8	1	g5t3		τῶν εἰδωλοθύτων	1	food sacrificed to idols	Gentile worshipers would offer grain, fish, fowl, or meat, to their gods. The priest would burn a portion of it on the altar. Paul is speaking of the portion the priest would give back for the worshiper to eat or sell in the market.
681	1CO	8	1	ri3s	figs-metaphor	ἡ γνῶσις φυσιοῖ	1	Knowledge puffs up	Here, **puffs up** is a metaphor for making someone proud. Alternate translation: “Knowledge makes people proud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
682	1CO	8	1	ytrf	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ γνῶσις φυσιοῖ,	1		The abstract noun **knowledge** can be expressed with the verb “know.” Alternate translation: “People who think that they know a lot become proud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
683	1CO	8	1	yw8s	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ δὲ ἀγάπη οἰκοδομεῖ	1	but love builds up	The abstract noun **love** can be expressed as a verb. Alternate translation: “but when we love people, we build them up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
684	1CO	8	1	an8s	figs-metaphor	ἀγάπη οἰκοδομεῖ	1	love builds up	Building people up represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. Alternate translation: “love strengthens people” or “when we love people, we strengthen them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
685	1CO	8	2	qbh9		δοκεῖ ἐγνωκέναι τι	1	thinks he knows something	“believes he knows everything about something”
686	1CO	8	3	etd6	figs-activepassive	οὗτος ἔγνωσται ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	that person is known by him	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God knows that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
687	1CO	8	4	v4gx	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	“We” and “us” here refer to all believers and include Paul’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
688	1CO	8	4	y3ee	figs-explicit	οἴδαμεν ὅτι οὐδὲν εἴδωλον ἐν κόσμῳ, καὶ ὅτι οὐδεὶς Θεὸς εἰ μὴ εἷς	1	We know that an idol in this world is nothing and that there is no God but one	Paul is probably quoting phrases that some Corinthians used. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
689	1CO	8	4	g67g	figs-metaphor	οἴδαμεν ὅτι οὐδὲν εἴδωλον ἐν κόσμῳ, καὶ ὅτι οὐδεὶς Θεὸς εἰ μὴ εἷς	1		Being **nothing** represents having no power. Alternate translation: “We all know, as you yourselves like to say, that an idol in this world has no power and that there is no God but one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
690	1CO	8	5	sl8j		λεγόμενοι θεοὶ	1	so-called gods	“things that people call gods”
691	1CO	8	5	l7ib		θεοὶ πολλοὶ καὶ κύριοι πολλοί	1	many “gods” and many “lords.”	Paul does not believe that many **gods** and many **lords** exist, but he recognizes that the pagans believe they do.
692	1CO	8	6	y6hq		ἀλλ’ ἡμῖν εἷς Θεὸς	1	Yet for us there is only one God	“yet we know that there is only one God”
693	1CO	8	7	th5p			0	General Information:	Paul is speaking here of **weak** brothers, people who cannot separate food sacrificed to idols from the worship of those idols. If a Christian eats food that has been sacrificed to an idol, weak brothers might think that God will allow them to worship the idol by eating the food. Even if the eater has not worshiped the idol and is simply eating the food, he has still corrupted his weak brothers’ conscience.
694	1CO	8	7	v7lt		πᾶσιν…τινὲς	1	everyone … some	“all people … some people who are now Christians”
695	1CO	8	7	ba7e		μολύνεται	1	is defiled	is ruined or harmed
696	1CO	8	8	ii4m	figs-personification	βρῶμα…ἡμᾶς οὐ παραστήσει τῷ Θεῷ	1	food will not present us to God	Paul speaks of **food** as though it were a person who could make God welcome us. Alternate translation: “food does not give us favor with God” or “the food we eat does not make God pleased with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
697	1CO	8	8	x91v	figs-doublenegatives	οὔτε ἐὰν μὴ φάγωμεν, ὑστερούμεθα; οὔτε ἐὰν φάγωμεν, περισσεύομεν	1	We are not worse if we do not eat, nor better if we do eat it	You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “Some people might think that if we do not eat some things, God will love us less. But they are wrong. Those who think that God will love us more if we do eat those things are also wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
698	1CO	8	9	f3ds		τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν	1	those who are weak	for believers who are not strong in their faith
699	1CO	8	10	usg7	figs-you	ἴδῃ τὸν ἔχοντα	1	sees the one who has	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so **the one** is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
700	1CO	8	10	i6ej		ἡ συνείδησις αὐτοῦ	1	his … conscience	what he understands to be right and wrong
701	1CO	8	10	x5pa		οἰκοδομηθήσεται, εἰς τὸ…ἐσθίειν	1	built up so as to eat	“will … be encouraged to eat”
702	1CO	8	11	ez6t	figs-you	τῇ σῇ γνώσει	1	your knowledge	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word **your** here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
703	1CO	8	11	g5tn		ἀπόλλυται…ὁ ἀσθενῶν	1	the one who is weak … is destroyed	The brother or sister who is not strong in his or her faith will sin or lose his or her faith.
704	1CO	8	13	i8tb		διόπερ	1	Therefore	“Because what I have just said is true”
705	1CO	8	13	vf92	figs-metonymy	εἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου	1	if food causes to stumble	Here, **food** is a metonym for the person eating the food. Alternate translation: “if I cause by eating” or “if I, because of what I eat, cause my brother to stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
706	1CO	9	intro	z8d4			0		# 1 Corinthians 9 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul defends himself in this chapter. Some people claimed that he was trying to gain financially from the church.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Earning money from the church<br><br>People accused Paul of just wanting money from the church. Paul answered that he rightfully could get money from the church. The Old Testament taught that those who worked should get their living from their work. He and Barnabas purposefully never used this right and earned their own living.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. These metaphors teach complex truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Contextualization<br><br>This passage is important because Paul “contextualizes” ministering the gospel to different audiences. This means that Paul makes himself and the gospel understandable without his actions hindering the gospel being received. The translator should take extra care to preserve aspects of this “contextualization” if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize various points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
707	1CO	9	1	fu7x			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul explains how he uses the liberty he has in Christ.
708	1CO	9	1	mdm4	figs-rquestion	οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐλεύθερος?	1	Am I not free?	Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of the rights he has. Alternate translation: “I am a free person.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
709	1CO	9	1	dbp9	figs-rquestion	οὐκ εἰμὶ ἀπόστολος?	1	Am I not an apostle?	Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of who he is and the rights he has. Alternate translation: “I am an apostle.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
710	1CO	9	1	re1t	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ Ἰησοῦν τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν ἑόρακα?	1	Have I not seen Jesus our Lord?	Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of who he is. Alternate translation: “I have seen Jesus our Lord.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
711	1CO	9	1	zd7e	figs-rquestion	οὐ τὸ ἔργον μου ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν Κυρίῳ?	1	Are you not my workmanship in the Lord?	Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of their relationship to him. Alternate translation: “You believe in Christ because I have worked the way the Lord wants me to.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
712	1CO	9	2	j6qz	figs-metonymy	ἡ…σφραγίς μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς, ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	you are the proof of my apostleship in the Lord	Here, **proof** is a metonym for the evidence needed to prove something. Alternate translation: “you are evidence I can use to prove that the Lord has chosen me to be an apostle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
713	1CO	9	3	b17x		ἡ ἐμὴ ἀπολογία τοῖς ἐμὲ ἀνακρίνουσίν ἐστιν αὕτη	1	This is my defense … me:	This could mean: (1) the words that follow are Paul’s defense. (2) the words in 1 Corinthians 9:1-2 are Paul’s defense.
714	1CO	9	4	mr4g	figs-rquestion	μὴ οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν φαγεῖν καὶ πεῖν?	1	Do we not have the right to eat and drink?	Paul uses a question to emphasize that he knows the Corinthians agree with what he is saying. Alternate translation: “We have the absolute right to receive food and drink from the churches.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
715	1CO	9	4	p4vq	figs-exclusive	ἔχομεν	1	we … have	Here, **we** refers to Paul and Barnabas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
716	1CO	9	5	s9k8	figs-rquestion	μὴ οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν ἀδελφὴν, γυναῖκα περιάγειν, ὡς καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ ἀπόστολοι, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τοῦ Κυρίου, καὶ Κηφᾶς?	1	Do we not have the right to take along with us a wife who is a believer, as do the rest of the apostles, and the brothers of the Lord, and Cephas?	Paul uses a question to emphasize that he knows the Corinthians agree with what he is saying. Alternate translation: “If we have believing wives, we have a right to take them with us just as the other apostles take them, and the brothers of the Lord, and Cephas.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
717	1CO	9	6	wx1p	figs-rquestion	ἢ μόνος ἐγὼ καὶ Βαρναβᾶς, οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν μὴ ἐργάζεσθαι?	1	Or is it only Barnabas and I who do not have the right not to work?	Paul is shaming the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “You seem to think that the only people you think need to work to earn money are Barnabas and me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
718	1CO	9	7	f3qf	figs-rquestion	τίς στρατεύεται ἰδίοις ὀψωνίοις ποτέ?	1	Who serves as a soldier at his own expense?	Paul uses a question to emphasize that he knows the Corinthians agree with what he is saying. Alternate translation: “We all know that no soldier has to buy his own supplies.” or “We all know that every soldier receives his supplies from the government.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
719	1CO	9	7	zh5m	figs-rquestion	τίς φυτεύει ἀμπελῶνα, καὶ τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἐσθίει?	1	Who plants a vineyard and does not eat its fruit?	Paul uses a question to emphasize that he knows the Corinthians agree with what he is saying. Alternate translation: “We all know that the one who plants a vineyard will always eat its fruit.” or “We all know that no one expects someone who plants a vineyard not to eat its fruits.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
720	1CO	9	7	r1ih	figs-rquestion	ἢ τίς ποιμαίνει ποίμνην, καὶ ἐκ τοῦ γάλακτος τῆς ποίμνης, οὐκ ἐσθίει?	1	Or who tends a flock and does not drink milk from it?	Paul uses a question to emphasize that he knows the Corinthians agree with what he is saying. Alternate translation: “And we all know that those who tend flocks get their drink from the flocks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
721	1CO	9	8	jld4	figs-rquestion	μὴ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, ταῦτα λαλῶ, ἢ καὶ ὁ νόμος ταῦτα οὐ λέγει?	1	Am I not saying these things according to human authority?	Paul is shaming the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “You seem to think that I am saying these things based on merely human authority, but the law of Moses also says the same thing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
722	1CO	9	8	vy1n	figs-rquestion	ἢ καὶ ὁ νόμος ταῦτα οὐ λέγει?	1	Or does not the law also say this?	Paul is shaming the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “You act as if you do not know that this is what is written in the law.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
723	1CO	9	9	h2d3	figs-you	οὐ φιμώσεις	1	Do not put a muzzle on	Moses was speaking to the Israelites as if they were one person, so this command is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
724	1CO	9	9	sxk2	figs-rquestion	μὴ τῶν βοῶν μέλει τῷ Θεῷ?	1	Is it really the oxen that God cares about?	Paul asks a question so that the Corinthians will think of what he is saying without him having to say it. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that it is not the oxen that God cares most about.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
725	1CO	9	10	x84t	figs-rquestion	ἢ δι’ ἡμᾶς πάντως λέγει?	1	Or is he speaking entirely for our sake?	Paul asks a question to emphasize the statement he is making. Alternate translation: “Instead, God was certainly speaking about us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
726	1CO	9	10	f8f4	figs-exclusive	δι’ ἡμᾶς	-1	for our sake	Here, both instances of **our** refer to Paul and Barnabas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
727	1CO	9	11	g1wh	figs-rquestion	ὑμῖν…μέγα εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῶν τὰ σαρκικὰ θερίσομεν?	1	is it too much for us to reap material things from you?	Paul asks a question so that the Corinthians will think of what he is saying without him having to say it. Alternate translation: “among you, you should know without me telling you that it is not too much for us to receive material support from you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
728	1CO	9	12	lld4	figs-rquestion	εἰ ἄλλοι τῆς ὑμῶν ἐξουσίας μετέχουσιν, οὐ μᾶλλον ἡμεῖς?	1	If others exercised this right over you, should we not even more?	Paul asks a question so that the Corinthians will think of what he is saying without him having to say it. Alternate translation: “Others exercised this right over you, so you know without me telling you that we have this right even more.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
729	1CO	9	12	v333		εἰ ἄλλοι τῆς…ἐξουσίας μετέχουσιν	1	If others exercised this right	Paul and the Corinthians both know that others exercised the right. “Since others exercised this right”
730	1CO	9	12	ybwy	figs-exclusive	οὐ μᾶλλον ἡμεῖς	1		Here, **we** refers to Paul and Barnabas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
731	1CO	9	12	nr6u		ἄλλοι	1	others	other workers of the gospel
732	1CO	9	12	q7vj		τῆς…ἐξουσίας	1	this right	the **right** to have the believers at Corinth provide for the living expenses of those who told them the good news
733	1CO	9	12	vt6t		μή τινα ἐνκοπὴν δῶμεν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ	1	to cause any hindrance	“we might now be a burden to the gospel” or “we would not stop the spread of the gospel”
734	1CO	9	13	slf9	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι οἱ τὰ ἱερὰ ἐργαζόμενοι, τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ ἐσθίουσιν; οἱ τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ παρεδρεύοντες, τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ συνμερίζονται?	1	Do you not know that those who serve in the temple eat from the things of the temple	Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they know so he can add new information. Alternate translation: “I want to remind you that those who serve in the temple get their food from the temple, and those who serve at the altar eat from the things presented on the altar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
735	1CO	9	14	rj38	figs-metonymy	ἐκ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ζῆν	1	get their living from the gospel	The words **the gospel** here are a metonym that refers to: (1) the people to whom they tell the gospel. Alternate translation: “receive their food and other things they need from those to whom they teach the good news” (2) the result of working to tell the gospel. Alternate translation: “receive their food and other things they need because they work to tell the good news.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
736	1CO	9	15	fs7a		οὐδενὶ τούτων	1	these rights	“of any of these things that I deserve”
737	1CO	9	15	sy42	figs-activepassive	ἵνα οὕτως γένηται ἐν ἐμοί	1	so that this might be done for me	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so you will do the same kind of things for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
738	1CO	9	15	fd69		τὸ καύχημά μου…κενώσει	1	deprive me of my boasting	“take away this opportunity I have to boast”
739	1CO	9	16	ecw2		ἀνάγκη…μοι ἐπίκειται	1	this necessity was placed upon me	“I must preach the gospel” or “God compels me to preach the gospel”
740	1CO	9	16	l7as		οὐαὶ…μοί ἐστιν	1	woe be to me if	“may I suffer misfortune”
741	1CO	9	17	x6s9		ἑκὼν τοῦτο πράσσω	1	if I do this willingly	“I preach willingly” or “I preach because I want to”
742	1CO	9	17	t8pm	figs-ellipsis	εἰ δὲ ἄκων	1	But if not willingly	The words “I do this” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “But if I do this unwillingly” or “But if I do this even though I do not want to” or “But if I do this because I was forced to do it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
743	1CO	9	17	xa5p	figs-activepassive	οἰκονομίαν πεπίστευμαι	1	I have been entrusted with a stewardship	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I must do this work that God trusted me to complete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
744	1CO	9	18	lg51	figs-rquestion	τίς οὖν μού ἐστιν ὁ μισθός?	1	What then is my reward?	Paul is preparing them for the new information he is going to give them. Alternate translation: “This is my reward.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
745	1CO	9	18	ia5x		ἵνα εὐαγγελιζόμενος ἀδάπανον, θήσω τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	That when I preach, I may offer the gospel without charge	“My reward for preaching is that I can preach without receiving payment”
746	1CO	9	18	dln7		θήσω τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	offer the gospel	“I might preach the gospel”
747	1CO	9	18	fn7i		εἰς τὸ μὴ καταχρήσασθαι τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ	1	so not take full use of my right in the gospel	“without asking people to support me as I travel and preach”
748	1CO	9	19	s48l	figs-metaphor	ἐλεύθερος…ὢν ἐκ πάντων	1	I am free from all	Here, **being free from all** is an idiom for having the ability to live without thinking of what one must do for others. Alternate translation: “although I am able to live without serving others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
749	1CO	9	19	mms9		τοὺς πλείονας κερδήσω	1	I might gain even more	“I might persuade others to believe” or “I might help others trust in Christ”
750	1CO	9	20	hh8t		ἐγενόμην…ὡς Ἰουδαῖος	1	I became like a Jew	“I acted like a Jew” or “I practiced Jewish customs”
751	1CO	9	20	s9tu		ὡς ὑπὸ νόμον	1	I became like one under the law	“I became like one committed to following the law of Moses”
752	1CO	9	21	qtu7		ἀνόμοις	1	outside the law	“who do not obey the laws of Moses”
753	1CO	9	24	vn1d			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul explains that he uses the liberty he has in Christ to discipline himself.
754	1CO	9	24	urh5	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι οἱ ἐν σταδίῳ τρέχοντες, πάντες μὲν τρέχουσιν, εἷς δὲ λαμβάνει τὸ βραβεῖον?	1	Do you not know that in a race all the runners run the race, but that only one receives the prize?	Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they know so he can add new information. Alternate translation: “Let me remind you that although all runners run the race, only one runner receives the prize.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
755	1CO	9	24	mq1d	figs-metaphor	τρέχουσιν	1	run	Paul compares living the Christian life and working for God to running a race and being an athlete. As in a race, the Christian life and work require strict discipline on the part of the runner, and, as in a race, the Christian has a specific goal. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
756	1CO	9	24	mh8z	figs-metaphor	οὕτως τρέχετε, ἵνα καταλάβητε	1	So run in such a way that you might obtain it	Paul is speaking of the reward God will give his faithful people as if it were a prize given for an athletic contest. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
757	1CO	9	25	bfe4	figs-metaphor	φθαρτὸν στέφανον…ἡμεῖς δὲ ἄφθαρτον	1	a wreath that is perishable … one that is imperishable	The word translated as **wreath** can either refer to the wreath of leaves that was given as prizes to athletes who won games and races. The same word can be translated as “crown.” Paul is using this double sense to compare the wreath which would dry up to a crown of eternal life that will never decay. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
758	1CO	9	26	k64n	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ…οὕτως τρέχω, ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως; οὕτως πυκτεύω, ὡς οὐκ ἀέρα δέρων	1	I do not run without purpose or box by beating the air	Here, **run** and **boxing** are both metaphors for living the Christian life and serving God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
759	1CO	9	26	muuc	figs-doublenegatives	ἐγὼ…οὕτως τρέχω, ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως; οὕτως πυκτεύω, ὡς οὐκ ἀέρα δέρων	1		You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “I know very well why I am running, and I know what I am doing when I box” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
760	1CO	9	26	m7gf	figs-doublenegatives	ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως	1		You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “with purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
761	1CO	9	27	blb7	figs-metaphor	αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι	1	I myself may not be disqualified	The judge of a race or competition is a metaphor for God. Alternate translation: “I would be disqualified by the judge” or “God would say that I failed to obey the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
762	1CO	9	27	s3sd	figs-activepassive	αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι	1		This passive sentence can be rephrased to an active form. Alternate translation: “the judge disqualify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
763	1CO	10	intro	abcd			0		# 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Chapters 8-10 together answer the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?”<br><br>In this chapter, Paul uses the exodus to warn people not to sin. Then, he returns to discussing meat offered to idols. He uses the Lord’s Supper as an example. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Exodus<br><br>Paul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])<br><br>### Eating meat sacrificed to idol<br><br>Paul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
764	1CO	10	1	r66h			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul reminds them of the example of their ancient Jewish fathers’ experiences with immorality and idolatry.
765	1CO	10	1	g34f	figs-exclusive	οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν πάντες ὑπὸ τὴν νεφέλην ἦσαν, καὶ πάντες διὰ τῆς θαλάσσης διῆλθον	1	our fathers	Paul is referring to the time of Moses in the book of Exodus when Israel fled through the Red Sea as the Egyptian army pursued them. The word **our** refers to himself and the Corinthians and is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
766	1CO	10	1	v4c6		τῆς θαλάσσης	1	passed through the sea	This **sea** is known by two names, the Red Sea and the Sea of Reeds.
767	1CO	10	1	z5s9		διὰ…διῆλθον	1	passed through	“walked through” or “traveled through”
768	1CO	10	2	f7cq		πάντες εἰς τὸν Μωϋσῆν ἐβαπτίσαντο	1	All were baptized into Moses	“they all followed and were committed to Moses”
769	1CO	10	2	y72i		ἐν τῇ νεφέλῃ	1	in the cloud	The **cloud** represented the presence of God and led the Israelites during the day.
770	1CO	10	4	xut2		πάντες τὸ αὐτὸ πνευματικὸν ἔπιον πόμα; ἔπινον γὰρ ἐκ πνευματικῆς ἀκολουθούσης πέτρας	1	drank the same spiritual drink … spiritual rock	“drank the same water that God supernaturally brought out of the rock that followed them”
771	1CO	10	4	whj4	figs-metonymy	ἡ…πέτρα ἦν ὁ Χριστός	1	that rock was Christ	The **rock** was a literal, physical rock, so it would be best to translate this literally. If your language cannot say that a rock was a person’s name, treat the word **rock** as a metonym for the power of Christ that worked through the rock. Alternate translation: “it was Christ who worked through that rock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
772	1CO	10	5	lh93	figs-litotes	οὐκ…ηὐδόκησεν	1	not well pleased	Alternate translation: “was displeased” or “was angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
773	1CO	10	5	tnu4		τοῖς πλείοσιν αὐτῶν	1	most of them	“most of the Israelite fathers”
774	1CO	10	5	w673	figs-activepassive	κατεστρώθησαν	1	their corpses were scattered about	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God scattered their dead bodies around” or “God killed them and scattered their bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
775	1CO	10	5	b96g		ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ	1	in the wilderness	The **wilderness** is the desert land between Egypt and Israel through which the Israelites wandered for 40 years.
776	1CO	10	7	ukp4	figs-euphemism	παίζειν	1	to play	Paul is quoting the Jewish scriptures. His readers would have understood from the phrase **to play** that the people were worshiping an idol by singing and dancing and engaging in sexual activities, not simply enjoying innocent fun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
777	1CO	10	8	vw5g		ἔπεσαν μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες	1	In one day, twenty-three thousand people died	“God killed 23,000 people in one day”
778	1CO	10	9	l5h4	figs-activepassive	ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο	1	were destroyed by snakes	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, snakes destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
779	1CO	10	10	i3q3	figs-activepassive	ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ	1	were destroyed by the destroyer	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, an angel of death destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
780	1CO	10	11	u1mp		ταῦτα…συνέβαινεν ἐκείνοις	1	these things happened to them	“God punished our ancestors”
781	1CO	10	11	wmp1	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	as examples	Here, **our** refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
782	1CO	10	11	j3z1		τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν	1	the end of the ages	“the last days have come”
783	1CO	10	12	df2p		μὴ πέσῃ	1	does not fall	“he does not sin or reject God”
784	1CO	10	13	a8vj	figs-doublenegatives	πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν, εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος	1	No temptation has overtaken you that is not common to all humanity	You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “The temptations that affect you are temptations that all people experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
785	1CO	10	13	hc7q		ὃς οὐκ ἐάσει ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε	1	He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability	This can be stated as a positive. Alternate translation: “who will only allow you to be tempted in ways that you are strong enough to resist”
786	1CO	10	13	a72t	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐάσει ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι	1	will not let you be tempted	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “will not allow anyone to tempt you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
787	1CO	10	14	dab4			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues to remind them to be pure and to stay away from idolatry and immorality as he talks about communion, which represents the blood and body of Christ.
788	1CO	10	14	n5tb	figs-metaphor	φεύγετε ἀπὸ τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας	1	flee away from idolatry	Paul is speaking of the practice of worshiping idols as if it were a physical thing like a dangerous animal. Alternate translation: “do all you can to get away from worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
789	1CO	10	16	gi4s		τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας…τὸν ἄρτον	1	The cup of blessing	Paul is speaking of the cup of wine and the bread that were used in the ritual of the Lord’s Supper.
790	1CO	10	16	tv8e		ὃ εὐλογοῦμεν	1	that we bless	“for which we thank God”
791	1CO	10	16	y5uv	figs-rquestion	τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας, ὃ εὐλογοῦμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία ἐστὶν τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ?	1	is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ?	Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know, that the cup of wine that we share represents us sharing in the blood of Christ. Alternate translation: “When we bless the cup in the Lord's Supper, we share in the blood of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
792	1CO	10	16	ngf6	figs-rquestion	τὸν ἄρτον ὃν κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐστιν?	1	The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ?	Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know. Alternate translation: “When we break the bread of the Lord's Supper, we share in the body of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
793	1CO	10	17	g954		ἄρτος	1	loaf of bread	a single unit of baked bread that is sliced or broken into pieces before it is eaten
794	1CO	10	18	q9ng	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας, κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου εἰσίν?	1	Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar?	Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: “those who eat the sacrifices share in the activities and the blessings of the altar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
795	1CO	10	19	ix5q	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν φημι?	1	What am I saying then?	Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: “Let me review what I am saying.” or “This is what I mean.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
796	1CO	10	19	j8dj	figs-ellipsis	ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν?	1	Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything?	The words “I am saying” are understood from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Am I saying that food sacrificed to idols or idols themselves are important?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
797	1CO	10	19	l9t4	figs-rquestion	ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν?	1		Paul wants the Corinthians to answer the question in their minds so he does not have to tell them. Alternate translation: “You know that I am not saying that an idol is something real or that food sacrificed to idols is important.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
798	1CO	10	21	dy2g	figs-metonymy	οὐ δύνασθε ποτήριον Κυρίου πίνειν, καὶ ποτήριον δαιμονίων	1	You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons	Paul speaks of a person drinking from the same cup as the demon as evidence that that person is a friend of the demon. Alternate translation: “It is impossible for you to be true friends with both the Lord and demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
799	1CO	10	21	qwk7		οὐ δύνασθε τραπέζης Κυρίου μετέχειν, καὶ τραπέζης δαιμονίων	1	You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons	“It is impossible for you to be truly one with the Lord’s people and also with demons”
800	1CO	10	22	l8ik	figs-rquestion	ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον?	1	Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy?	Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this question in their minds. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that it is not right to make the Lord jealous.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
801	1CO	10	22	h9fh		παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον	1	provoke	to anger or irritate the Lord
802	1CO	10	22	zv17	figs-rquestion	μὴ ἰσχυρότεροι αὐτοῦ ἐσμεν?	1	We are not stronger than him, are we?	Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this question in their minds. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that we are not stronger than God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
803	1CO	10	23	ped1			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul again reminds them of the law of liberty and doing everything for the benefit of others.
804	1CO	10	23	tu2m		πάντα ἔξεστιν	1	Everything is lawful	This could mean: (1) Paul is answering what some Corinthians might be thinking, “Some say, ‘I can do anything’.” (2) Paul is actually saying what he thinks is true, “God allows me to do anything.” This should be translated as in [1 Corinthians 6:12](../06/12.md).
805	1CO	10	23	jm4k		οὐ πάντα συμφέρει	1	not everything is beneficial	“some things are not beneficial”
806	1CO	10	23	ex6z	figs-metaphor	οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ	1	not everything builds people up	To **build up** people represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated “builds up” in [1 Corinthians 8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “not everything strengthens people” or “some things do not strengthen people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
807	1CO	10	27	g31y		ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν	1	you without asking questions of conscience	“you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience”
808	1CO	10	28	q3zt	figs-you	ἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα	1	But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you	Some translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
809	1CO	10	28	qi77	figs-you	ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα	1	says to you … do not eat … informed you	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of the word **you** and the command **do not eat it** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
810	1CO	10	29	v1d9	figs-you	συνείδησιν δὲ λέγω, οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ	1	the conscience of the other man, I mean, and not yours	Some translations put these words, along with the words in the verse before this one, in parentheses because (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
811	1CO	10	29	s1wk	figs-you	οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ	1	and not yours	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word **your** here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
812	1CO	10	29	k8xr		ἵνα τί γὰρ ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως?	1	For why … conscience?	Possible meanings for this question, along with the question in the next verse, are (1) The word **For** refers back to [1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md). Alternate translation: “I am not to ask questions of conscience, so why … conscience?” (2) Paul is quoting what some Corinthians were thinking. Alternate translation: “As some of you might be thinking, ‘For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?’”
813	1CO	10	29	d4q1	figs-rquestion	ἵνα τί γὰρ ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως?	1	why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience?	The speaker wants the hearer to answer the question in his mind. Alternate translation: “For you should know without me telling you that no one should be able to say I am doing wrong just because that person has ideas about right and wrong that are different from mine.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
814	1CO	10	30	dv5f	figs-rquestion	εἰ ἐγὼ χάριτι μετέχω, τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ?	1	If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks?	The speaker wants the hearer to answer the question in his mind. Alternate translation: “I partake of the meal with gratitude, so no one should insult me for that for which I gave thanks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
815	1CO	10	30	x2v5		εἰ ἐγὼ…μετέχω	1	If I partake	If Paul is not quoting what some Corinthians might be thinking, the **I** represents those who eat meat with thankfulness. “If a person partakes” or “When a person eats”
816	1CO	10	30	n89t		χάριτι	1	with gratitude	“and thank God for it” or “and thank the person who gave it to me for it”
817	1CO	10	32	ag47		ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν	1	Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks	“Do not displease Jews or Greeks” or “Do not make Jews or Greeks angry”
818	1CO	10	33	hd2z		τὸ τῶν πολλῶν	1	the many	as many people as possible
819	1CO	11	intro	abce			0		# 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord’s Supper (verses 17-34).<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Proper conduct in a church service<br><br>### Disorderly women<br><br>Paul’s instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.<br><br>### The Lord’s Supper<br><br>There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord’s Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord’s Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ’s death if they participated in the Lord’s Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>### The head<br><br>Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person’s actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
820	1CO	11	1	h5fg			0	Connecting Statement:	After reminding them to follow him the way he follows Christ, Paul gives some specific instructs in how women and men are to live as believers.
821	1CO	11	2	qsk9		πάντα μου μέμνησθε	1	you remember me in everything	“you think of me at all times” or “you always try act as I would want you to act” The Corinthians had not forgotten who Paul was or what he had taught them.
822	1CO	11	3	k5um		θέλω δὲ	1	Now I want	This could mean: (1) Paul is saying, “Because of this, I want.” (2) Paul is saying, “However, I want.”
823	1CO	11	3	hbt7		ἡ κεφαλὴ…ἐστιν	1	is the head	has authority over
824	1CO	11	3	en95		κεφαλὴ…γυναικὸς ὁ ἀνήρ	2	a man is the head of a woman	This could mean: (1) men are to have authority over women. (2) the husband is to have authority over the wife.
825	1CO	11	4	uuv2		προφητεύων κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων	1	having something on his head	“prophesying after placing a cloth or veil over his head”
826	1CO	11	4	lit3		καταισχύνει τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ	1	dishonors his head	This could mean: (1) this brings disgrace on the man. (2) this brings disgrace on Christ, who is the head of the man.
827	1CO	11	5	b7ku		γυνὴ προσευχομένη ἢ προφητεύουσα ἀκατακαλύπτῳ τῇ κεφαλῇ, καταισχύνει τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτῆς	1	woman who prays … dishonors her head	This could mean: (1) a woman who prays with her head uncovered brings disgrace on herself. (2) a woman who prays with her head uncovered brings disgrace on her husband.
828	1CO	11	5	k5yl		ἀκατακαλύπτῳ τῇ κεφαλῇ	1	with her head uncovered	That is, without the cloth that was worn on the top of the **head** and that covered the hair.
829	1CO	11	5	e1pz		τῇ ἐξυρημένῃ	1	as if her head were shaved	as if she had removed all the hair on her head with a razor
830	1CO	11	6	s4r5		εἰ…αἰσχρὸν γυναικὶ	2	If it is disgraceful for a woman	It was a mark of disgrace or humiliation for a woman to have her hair shaved off or cut short.
831	1CO	11	7	aa4r	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ὀφείλει κατακαλύπτεσθαι τὴν κεφαλήν	1	should not have his head covered	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: This could mean: (1) a man must not cover his head. (2) a man does not need to cover his head. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
832	1CO	11	7	t5jn		δόξα ἀνδρός	1	glory of the man	Just as man reflects God’s greatness, the woman reflects the man’s character.
833	1CO	11	8	s5ns	figs-activepassive	οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἀνὴρ ἐκ γυναικός, ἀλλὰ γυνὴ ἐξ ἀνδρός.	1	For man was not made from woman. Instead, woman was made from man	God made the **woman** by taking a bone from the **man** and making the woman from that bone. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God did not make the man from the woman. Instead, he made the woman from the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
834	1CO	11	8	w8jm		οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἀνὴρ ἐκ γυναικός, ἀλλὰ γυνὴ ἐξ ἀνδρός.	1	For neither … for man	All of [1 Corinthians 11:8-9](../11/08.md) could be put in parentheses so that the reader can see that “This is why” in [1 Corinthians 11:10](../11/10.md) refers back to the words “the woman is the glory of the man” in [1 Corinthians 11:7](../11/07.md).
835	1CO	11	10	wh4c		ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς	1	have a symbol of authority on her head	This could symbolize that: (1) she has man as her head.” (2) she has the authority to pray or prophesy.
836	1CO	11	11	pir4		πλὴν…ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	Nevertheless, in the Lord	“While what I have just said is all true, the most important thing is this: in the Lord”
837	1CO	11	11	h9t4		ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	in the Lord	This could mean: (1) “among Christians, who belong to the Lord.” (2) “in the world as created by God.”
838	1CO	11	11	hqy4	figs-doublenegatives	οὔτε γυνὴ χωρὶς ἀνδρὸς, οὔτε ἀνὴρ χωρὶς γυναικὸς ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	the woman is not independent from the man, nor is the man independent from the woman	You can state this positively. Alternate translation: “the woman depends on the man, and the man depends on the woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
839	1CO	11	12	i8qu		τὰ…πάντα ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	all things come from God	“God created everything”
840	1CO	11	13	eex3		ἐν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς κρίνατε	1	Judge for yourselves	“Judge this issue according to the local customs and church practices you know”
841	1CO	11	13	hp13	figs-rquestion	πρέπον ἐστὶν γυναῖκα ἀκατακάλυπτον, τῷ Θεῷ προσεύχεσθαι?	1	Is it proper for a woman to pray to God with her head uncovered?	Paul expects the Corinthians to agree with him. You can state this in active form. “To honor God, a woman should pray to God with a covering on her head.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
842	1CO	11	14	v5b5	figs-rquestion	οὐδὲ ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ διδάσκει ὑμᾶς, ὅτι ἀνὴρ μὲν ἐὰν κομᾷ, ἀτιμία αὐτῷ ἐστιν;	1	Does not even nature itself teach you … for him?	This is the first part of a rhetorical question that continues into the next verse. Paul expects the Corinthians to agree with him. Alternate translation: “Even nature teaches you that if a man might have long hair, it is a disgrace for him;” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
843	1CO	11	14	gyw9	figs-personification	οὐδὲ ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ διδάσκει ὑμᾶς, ὅτι ἀνὴρ μὲν ἐὰν κομᾷ, ἀτιμία αὐτῷ ἐστιν	1	Does not even nature itself teach you … for him?	He is speaking of nature as if it were a person who teaches. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
844	1CO	11	15	s7ys	figs-activepassive	ὅτι ἡ κόμη…δέδοται αὐτῇ	1	For her hair has been given to her	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “For God created woman with long hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
845	1CO	11	17	id4f			0	Connecting Statement:	As Paul talks about communion, the Lord’s supper, he reminds them to have right attitudes as well as unity. He reminds them that if they fail in those things when taking communion, they will become sick and die, as has already happened to some of them.
846	1CO	11	17	vt5a		τοῦτο δὲ παραγγέλλων	1	in the following instructions, I do not praise you. For	“But as I give you these instructions”
847	1CO	11	17	du1a		οὐκ εἰς τὸ κρεῖσσον, ἀλλὰ εἰς τὸ ἧσσον	1	it is not for the better but for the worse	“you do not help each other; instead, you harm each other”
848	1CO	11	18	iu3q		ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	in the church	“as believers.” Paul is not talking about being inside a building.
849	1CO	11	18	l9vx		σχίσματα ἐν ὑμῖν ὑπάρχειν	1	there are divisions among you	“you divide yourselves into opposing groups”
850	1CO	11	19	s9sy	figs-irony	δεῖ γὰρ καὶ αἱρέσεις ἐν ὑμῖν εἶναι, ἵνα καὶ οἱ δόκιμοι φανεροὶ γένωνται ἐν ὑμῖν	1	For there must also be factions among you	This could mean: (1) the phrase **it is necessary** indicates that this situation is likely to happen. Alternate translation: “For there will probably be factions among you” (2) Paul was using irony to shame them for having factions. Alternate translation: “For you seem to think that there must be factions among you” or “For you seem to think that you must divide yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
851	1CO	11	19	kcr7		αἱρέσεις	1	factions	opposing groups of people
852	1CO	11	19	j7db		δόκιμοι	1	who are approved	This could refer to: (1) the ones whom God approves” (2) the ones whom the church approves.
853	1CO	11	20	x9h5		συνερχομένων…ὑμῶν	1	come together	“when you gather together”
854	1CO	11	20	dse7		οὐκ ἔστιν Κυριακὸν δεῖπνον φαγεῖν	1	it is not the Lord’s Supper that you eat	“you may believe you are eating the Lord’s Supper, but you do not treat it with respect”
855	1CO	11	22	f8ht	figs-rquestion	μὴ γὰρ οἰκίας οὐκ ἔχετε εἰς τὸ ἐσθίειν καὶ πίνειν?	1		Paul is rebuking the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “For if you just want to eat and to drink, you certainly have houses where you can do that!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
856	1CO	11	22	zl1h		εἰς τὸ ἐσθίειν καὶ πίνειν	1	to eat and to drink in	“in which to gather for a meal”
857	1CO	11	22	am33	figs-rquestion	ἢ τῆς ἐκκλησίας τοῦ Θεοῦ καταφρονεῖτε, καὶ καταισχύνετε τοὺς μὴ ἔχοντας?	1		Paul is rebuking the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “You are acting in such a way that despises the church of God and humiliates those who have nothing!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
858	1CO	11	22	d2cm		καταφρονεῖτε	1	despise	hate or treat with dishonor and disrespect
859	1CO	11	22	nz88	figs-rquestion	τί εἴπω ὑμῖν? ἐπαινέσω ὑμᾶς ἐν τούτῳ?	1	What should I say to you? Should I praise you?	Paul is rebuking the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “I can say nothing good about this. I cannot praise you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
860	1CO	11	23	av31		ἐγὼ γὰρ παρέλαβον ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου, ὃ καὶ παρέδωκα ὑμῖν, ὅτι ὁ Κύριος	1	For I received from the Lord what I also passed on to you, that the Lord	“For it was from the Lord that I heard what I told you, and it was this: the Lord”
861	1CO	11	23	c197	figs-activepassive	ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ᾗ παρεδίδετο	1	on the night when he was betrayed	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “on the night that Judas Iscariot betrayed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
862	1CO	11	24	e19d		ἔκλασεν	1	he broke it	“he pulled pieces from it”
863	1CO	11	24	f6hn		τοῦτό μού ἐστιν τὸ σῶμα	1	This is my body	“The bread I am holding is my body”
864	1CO	11	25	gr2k		τὸ ποτήριον	1	the cup	It is best to translate this literally. The Corinthians knew which cup he took, so it is not simply “a cup” or “some cup” or “any cup.” This could refer to: (1) the cup of wine that one would expect him to use. (2) the third or fourth of the four cups of wine that the Jews drank at the Passover meal.
865	1CO	11	25	z54e		τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, ὁσάκις ἐὰν πίνητε	1	Do this as often as you drink it	“Drink from this cup, and as often as you drink from it”
866	1CO	11	26	m89f	figs-explicit	ἄχρι οὗ ἔλθῃ	1	until he comes	Where Jesus comes to can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “until Jesus comes back to the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
867	1CO	11	27	as6y		ἐσθίῃ τὸν ἄρτον ἢ πίνῃ τὸ ποτήριον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	eats the bread or drinks the cup of the Lord	“the bread of the Lord or drinks the cup of the Lord”
868	1CO	11	28	nhx7	figs-metaphor	δοκιμαζέτω…ἄνθρωπος	1	examine	Paul speaks of a person looking at his relationship to God and how he has been living his life as if that person is looking over something he wants to buy. See how “test the quality” is translated in [1 Corinthians 3:13](../03/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
869	1CO	11	29	gqd2		μὴ διακρίνων τὸ σῶμα	1	without discerning the body	This could mean: (1) that person does not recognize that the church is the body of the Lord. (2) that person does not consider that he is handling the Lord’s body.
870	1CO	11	30	kbi6		ἀσθενεῖς καὶ ἄρρωστοι	1	weak and ill	These words mean almost the same thing and can be combined, as in UST.
871	1CO	11	30	vx5t	figs-euphemism	κοιμῶνται ἱκανοί	1	and many of you have fallen asleep	Here, **fallen asleep** is a euphemism for death. Alternate translation: “and some of you have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]).
872	1CO	11	30	bh6j	figs-explicit	ἱκανοί	1	many of you	If this would sound like Paul is talking to those who have died, you may need to make explicit that he is not. Alternate translation: “many of the members of your group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
873	1CO	11	31	j6ml	figs-metaphor	διεκρίνομεν	1	examine	Paul speaks of a person looking at his relationship to God and how he has been living his life as if that person is looking over something he wants to buy. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 11:28](../11/28.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
874	1CO	11	31	egl8	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἂν ἐκρινόμεθα	1	we will not be judged	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God would not judge us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
875	1CO	11	32	ruq5	figs-activepassive	κρινόμενοι…ὑπὸ Κυρίου, παιδευόμεθα, ἵνα μὴ…κατακριθῶμεν	1	we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined, so that we may not be condemned	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the Lord judges us, he disciplines us, so that he will not condemn us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
876	1CO	11	33	maa7		συνερχόμενοι εἰς τὸ φαγεῖν	1	come together to eat	gather to eat a meal together before celebrating the Lord’s Supper
877	1CO	11	33	nky5		ἀλλήλους ἐκδέχεσθε	1	wait for one another	“allow the others to arrive before beginning the meal”
878	1CO	11	34	v2uh		ἐν οἴκῳ ἐσθιέτω	1	let him eat at home	“let him eat before attending this gathering”
879	1CO	11	34	x1l8	figs-metonymy	μὴ εἰς κρίμα συνέρχησθε	1	not be for judgment	“it will not be an occasion for God to discipline you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
880	1CO	12	intro	abcf			0		# 1 Corinthians 12 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>### Gifts of the Holy Spirit<br><br>This chapter begins a new section. Chapters 12-14 discuss spiritual gifts within the church.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The Church, the body of Christ<br><br>This is an important metaphor in Scripture. The Church has many different parts. Each part has different functions. They combine to make one church. All of the different parts are necessary. Each part is to be concerned for all the other parts, even those that seem less important. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “No one can say, ‘Jesus is Lord,’ except by the Holy Spirit.”<br><br>In reading the Old Testament, the Jews would have substituted the word “Lord” for the word “Yahweh.” This sentence probably means that no one can say that Jesus is Yahweh, God in the flesh, without the Holy Spirit’s influence drawing them to accept this truth. If this statement is translated poorly, it can have unintended theological consequences.
881	1CO	12	1	da2e			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul lets them know that God has given special gifts to believers. These gifts are to help the body of believers.
882	1CO	12	1	i3k7	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν	1	I do not want you to be uninformed	You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
883	1CO	12	2	hbt8	figs-metaphor	ἔθνη ἦτε, πρὸς τὰ εἴδωλα τὰ ἄφωνα ὡς ἂν ἤγεσθε, ἀπαγόμενοι	1	you were led astray to idols who could not speak, in whatever ways you were led by them	Here, **led astray** is a metaphor for being persuaded to do something wrong. Being led astray to idols represents being wrongly persuaded to worship idols. Alternate translation: “you were persuaded in some way to worship idols who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
884	1CO	12	2	xnw1	figs-activepassive	ἔθνη ἦτε, πρὸς τὰ εἴδωλα τὰ ἄφωνα ὡς ἂν ἤγεσθε, ἀπαγόμενοι	1		You can state the phrases “were led astray” and “you were led by them” in active form. Alternate translation: “you believed lies somehow and so you worshiped idols who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
885	1CO	12	3	zg4j		οὐδεὶς ἐν Πνεύματι Θεοῦ λαλῶν, λέγει	1	no one who speaks by the Spirit of God can say	This could mean: (1) “no Christian who has the Spirit of God in him can say.” (2) “no one who is prophesying by the power of the Spirit of God can say.”
886	1CO	12	3	jak6		ἀνάθεμα Ἰησοῦς	1	Jesus is accursed	“God will punish Jesus” or “God will make Jesus suffer”
887	1CO	12	6	eth3		ὁ ἐνεργῶν τὰ πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν	1	who is working all things in everyone	“who causes everyone to have them”
888	1CO	12	7	x7mv	figs-activepassive	ἑκάστῳ…δίδοται	1	to each one is given	You can state this in active form. God is the one who does the giving ([1 Corinthians 12:6](../12/06.md)). Alternate translation: “God gives to each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
889	1CO	12	8	c9ak	figs-activepassive	ᾧ μὲν…διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος δίδοται λόγος	1	to one is given by the Spirit a word	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “by means of the Spirit God gives to one person a word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
890	1CO	12	8	us1k		λόγος	1	a word	“a message”
891	1CO	12	8	pe8s	figs-activepassive	δίδοται	1	is given	You can state this in active form. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 12:8](../12/08.md). Alternate translation: “God gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
892	1CO	12	9	d7qg	figs-ellipsis	ἄλλῳ…χαρίσματα ἰαμάτων ἐν τῷ ἑνὶ Πνεύματι	1	to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit	The words **are given** are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit are given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
893	1CO	12	10	x572	figs-ellipsis	ἄλλῳ προφητεία	1	to another prophecy	The phrase “is given by the same Spirit” is understood from the previous phrases. Alternate translation: “to another prophecy is given by the same Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
894	1CO	12	10	v7xy	figs-ellipsis	ἑτέρῳ γένη γλωσσῶν	1	to another various kinds of tongues	The phrase “are given by the same Spirit” is understood from the previous phrases. Alternate translation: “to another various kinds of tongues are given by the same Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
895	1CO	12	10	skl8	figs-metonymy	γένη γλωσσῶν	1	various kinds of tongues	Here, **tongues** represents languages. Alternate translation: “the ability to speak different languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
896	1CO	12	10	j8qk	figs-ellipsis	ἄλλῳ…ἑρμηνία γλωσσῶν	4	to another the interpretation of tongues	The phrase “is given by the same Spirit” is understood from the previous phrases. Alternate translation: “to another the interpretation of tongues is given by the same Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
897	1CO	12	10	c14y		ἑρμηνία γλωσσῶν	1	the interpretation of tongues	This refers to the ability to listen to what someone says in one language and use another language to tell people what that person is saying. Alternate translation: “the ability to interpret what is said in other languages”
898	1CO	12	11	z383		τὸ ἓν καὶ τὸ αὐτὸ Πνεῦμα	1	one and the same Spirit	God gives the gifts through the work of the one and only Holy **Spirit**. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 12:8](../12/08.md).
899	1CO	12	12	j3xl			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues to talk of the variety of gifts God gives believers, God gives different gifts to different believers, but Paul wants them to know that all believers are made into one body, which is called the body of Christ. For this reason believers should have unity.
900	1CO	12	13	g8uk	figs-activepassive	ἐν ἑνὶ Πνεύματι ἡμεῖς πάντες…ἐβαπτίσθημεν	1	For by one Spirit we were all baptized	This could mean: (1) the Holy Spirit is the one who baptizes us. Alternate translation: “one Spirit baptized us” (2) the Spirit, like the water of baptism, is the medium through which we are baptized into the body. Alternate translation: “God baptized is all with the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
901	1CO	12	13	r9hm	figs-metonymy	εἴτε…δοῦλοι, εἴτε ἐλεύθεροι	3	whether bound or free	Here, **bound** is a metonym for “enslaved.” Alternate translation: “whether slave-people or free-people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
902	1CO	12	13	r5kw	figs-metaphor	πάντες ἓν Πνεῦμα ἐποτίσθημεν	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	Here the **Spirit** is spoken of as something that a person can drink. Alternate translation: “we were made to drink the Spirit as people might share a drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
903	1CO	12	13	ju15	figs-activepassive	πάντες ἓν Πνεῦμα ἐποτίσθημεν	1		You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God gave all of us the same Spirit to drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
904	1CO	12	17	rsl6	figs-rquestion	εἰ ὅλον τὸ σῶμα ὀφθαλμός, ποῦ ἡ ἀκοή? εἰ ὅλον ἀκοή, ποῦ ἡ ὄσφρησις?	1	where would the sense of hearing be? … where would the sense of smell be?	Paul asks these two questions to help the Corinthians to realize the importance of each part of the body. You can translate these as statements. Alternate translation: “If your whole body were an eye, you would not be able to hear anything! If your whole were an ear, you would not be able to smell anything!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
905	1CO	12	19	y4vg	figs-rquestion	εἰ δὲ ἦν τὰ πάντα ἓν μέλος, ποῦ τὸ σῶμα?	1	where would the body be?	Paul asks this question to help the Corinthians to understand that the body must have many different kinds of members. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “But if all the parts of the body were the same, there would be no body!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
906	1CO	12	19	zw6k		τὰ…ἓν μέλος	1	the same member	The word **member** is a general word for the parts of the body, like the head, arm, or knee. Alternate translation: “the same part of the body”
907	1CO	12	23	id5z	figs-euphemism	τὰ ἀσχήμονα ἡμῶν	1	our unpresentable members	Here, **unpresentable members** probably refers to the private parts of the body, which people keep covered. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
908	1CO	12	25	z4kk		μὴ ᾖ σχίσμα ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἀλλὰ	1	there may be no division within the body, but	“the body may be unified, and”
909	1CO	12	26	da97	figs-activepassive	δοξάζεται μέλος	1	one member is honored	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone gives honor to one member” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
910	1CO	12	27	z2ct		ὑμεῖς δέ ἐστε	1	Now you are	Here the word **Now** is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
911	1CO	12	28	ll3s		πρῶτον ἀποστόλους	1	first apostles	This could mean: (1) the first gift Paul will mention is apostles. (2) the most important gift Paul will mention is apostles.
912	1CO	12	28	unh1		ἀντιλήμψεις	1	those who provide helps	“those who provide help to other believers”
913	1CO	12	28	l6p1		κυβερνήσεις	1	those who do the work of administration	“those who govern the church”
914	1CO	12	28	w726		γένη γλωσσῶν	1	those who have various kinds of tongues	people who can speak in one or more foreign languages without having studied that language
915	1CO	12	29	aq64	figs-rquestion	μὴ πάντες ἀπόστολοι? μὴ πάντες προφῆται? μὴ πάντες διδάσκαλοι? μὴ πάντες δυνάμεις?	1	Are all of them apostles? Are all prophets? Are all teachers? Do all do powerful deeds?	Paul uses these questions to remind his readers of what they already know. Alternate translation: “Only some of them are apostles. Only some of them are prophets. Only some of them are teachers. Only some of them do powerful deeds.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
916	1CO	12	30	p919	figs-rquestion	μὴ πάντες χαρίσματα ἔχουσιν ἰαμάτων? μὴ πάντες γλώσσαις λαλοῦσιν? μὴ πάντες διερμηνεύουσιν?	1	Do all of them have gifts of healing?	Paul continues to use questions to remind his readers of what they already know. Alternate translation: “Only some have gifts of healing. Only some speak with tongues. Only some interpret tongues.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
917	1CO	12	30	ab9e		διερμηνεύουσιν	1	interpret	To **interpret** means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md).
918	1CO	12	31	vb1m		ζηλοῦτε…τὰ χαρίσματα τὰ μείζονα	1	earnestly desire the greater gifts.	This could mean: (1) they must eagerly seek from God the gifts that best help the church. (2) they are eagerly looking for gifts that they think are greater because they think those are more exciting to have.
919	1CO	13	intro	abcg			0		# 1 Corinthians 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul seems to interrupt his teaching about spiritual gifts. However, this chapter probably serves a larger function in his teaching.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Love<br><br>Love is the most important characteristic of the believer. This chapter fully describes love. Paul tells why love is more important than the gifts of the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/love]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>Paul uses many different metaphors in this chapter. He uses these metaphors to instruct the Corinthians, especially on difficult topics. Readers often need spiritual discernment to understand these teachings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
920	1CO	13	1	n8lm			0	Connecting Statement:	Having just talked about the gifts that God gave to believers, Paul emphasizes what is more important.
921	1CO	13	1	cm2n	figs-hyperbole	ταῖς γλώσσαις…τῶν ἀγγέλων	1	the tongues of … angels	This could mean: (1) Paul is exaggerating for the sake of effect and does not believe that people speak the language that angels use. (2) Paul thinks that some who speak in tongues actually speak the language that angels use. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
922	1CO	13	1	k2gk	figs-metaphor	γέγονα χαλκὸς ἠχῶν ἢ κύμβαλον ἀλαλάζον	1	I have become a noisy gong or a clanging cymbal	A person speaking without love is compared to musical instruments that make loud, annoying sounds. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
923	1CO	13	1	krt1	translate-unknown	χαλκὸς	1	gong	A **gong** is a large, thin, round metal plate that is hit with a padded stick to make a loud sound. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
924	1CO	13	1	qbx6	translate-unknown	κύμβαλον ἀλαλάζον	1	a clanging cymbal	A **cymbal** is a thin, round metal plate that is hit with something—or two cymbals are struck together—to make a loud sound. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
925	1CO	13	3	ar2q	figs-explicit	παραδῶ τὸ σῶμά μου	1	I give my body	The phrase **had over my body** refers to giving up one's own body to be abused or killed. Alternate translation: “I allow people to persecute or kill me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
926	1CO	13	4	m671	figs-personification	ἡ ἀγάπη μακροθυμεῖ, χρηστεύεται; ἡ ἀγάπη οὐ ζηλοῖ; ἡ ἀγάπη οὐ περπερεύεται, οὐ φυσιοῦται	1	Love is patient and kind … It is not arrogant	Here Paul speaks about **Love** as if it were a person who could do these actions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
927	1CO	13	5	cp6x	figs-personification		0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues speaking about love as if it were a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
928	1CO	13	5	xt3v	figs-activepassive	οὐ παροξύνεται	1	It is not easily angered	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “no one will be able to make it angry quickly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
929	1CO	13	6	wl5y	figs-personification		0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues speaking about love as if it were a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
930	1CO	13	6	tpz6	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ χαίρει ἐπὶ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ, συνχαίρει δὲ τῇ ἀληθείᾳ	1	It does not rejoice in unrighteousness. Instead, it rejoices in the truth	You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “It rejoices only in righteousness and truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
931	1CO	13	7	vf6x	figs-personification		0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues speaking about love as if it were a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
932	1CO	13	12	bn3h		βλέπομεν γὰρ ἄρτι δι’ ἐσόπτρου ἐν αἰνίγματι	1	For now we see indirectly in a mirror	In Paul’s day, a **mirror** was made of polished metal rather than glass and provided a dim, vague reflection.
933	1CO	13	12	w2eu		βλέπομεν…ἄρτι	1	now we see	This could mean: (1) they now see Christ. (2) they now see God.
934	1CO	13	12	xx1g	figs-ellipsis	τότε δὲ πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον	1	but then face to face	The words “we will see” are implied here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
935	1CO	13	12	tjq9	figs-synecdoche	τότε δὲ πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον	1		Here, **face to face** means that we will be physically present with Christ. Alternate translation: “but then we will see Christ face to face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
936	1CO	13	12	qp7g	figs-ellipsis	ἐπιγνώσομαι	1	I will know fully	The word “Christ” is understood. Alternate translation: “I will know Christ fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
937	1CO	13	12	i28w	figs-activepassive	καθὼς καὶ ἐπεγνώσθην	1	just as I have also been fully known	You can state this as active. Alternate translation: “just as Christ has known me fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
938	1CO	13	13	nt1y	figs-abstractnouns	πίστις, ἐλπίς, ἀγάπη	1	faith, hope, and love	The abstract nouns **faith**, **hope**, and **love** can be expressed in phrases with verbs. Alternate translation: “we must trust the Lord, be confident that he will do what he has promised, and love him and others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
939	1CO	14	intro	abch			0		# 1 Corinthians 14 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In this chapter, Paul returns to discussing spiritual gifts.<br><br>Some translations set what is quoted from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the words of verse 21.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Tongues<br><br>Scholars disagree on the exact meaning of the gift of tongues. Paul describes the gift of tongues as a sign for unbelievers. It does not serve the whole church, unless someone interprets what is spoken. It is very important that the church uses this gift properly.<br><br>### Prophecy<br><br>Scholars disagree on the exact meaning of prophecy as a spiritual gift. Paul says prophets can build up the entire church. He describes prophecy as a gift for believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
940	1CO	14	1	vl57			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul wants them to know that though teaching is more important because it instructs people, it must be done with love.
941	1CO	14	1	x938	figs-personification	διώκετε τὴν ἀγάπην	1	Pursue love	Paul speaks of **love** as if it were a person. Alternate translation: “Follow after love” or “Work hard to love people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
942	1CO	14	1	ki3l		μᾶλλον…ἵνα προφητεύητε	1	especially that you may prophesy	“work especially hard to be able to prophesy”
943	1CO	14	3	r1nx	figs-metaphor	οἰκοδομὴν	1	to build them up	Here, **building up** represents helping people become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated “builds up” in [1 Corinthians 8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “for strengthening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
944	1CO	14	4	b2mg	figs-metaphor	ἑαυτὸν οἰκοδομεῖ	1	builds up	Here, **builds up** represents helping himself become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated “builds up” in [1 Corinthians 8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “strengthens himself in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
945	1CO	14	5	z5my	figs-synecdoche	μείζων δὲ ὁ προφητεύων	1	Now the one who prophesies is greater	Paul is emphasizing that the gift of prophecy is greater than the gift of speaking in tongues. Alternate translation: “The one who prophesies has a greater gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
946	1CO	14	5	g9k1		διερμηνεύῃ	1	he would interpret	This means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md).
947	1CO	14	6	l71k	figs-rquestion	ἐὰν ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς γλώσσαις λαλῶν, τί ὑμᾶς ὠφελήσω, ἐὰν μὴ ὑμῖν λαλήσω, ἢ ἐν ἀποκαλύψει, ἢ ἐν γνώσει, ἢ ἐν προφητείᾳ, ἢ διδαχῇ?	1	how will I benefit you?	This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “if I come to you speaking in tongues, I will not benefit you, unless I speak to you either in revelation or in knowledge or in prophecy or teaching.” or “if I come to you speaking in tongues, I will not have done anything that helps you, unless I speak to you either in revelation or in knowledge or in prophecy or teaching.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
948	1CO	14	7	t3rb		διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ	1	they do not make different sounds	Here, **sounds** refers to different pitches that make up the melody, not to the difference between a flute sound and a harp sound.
949	1CO	14	7	hq2u	figs-rquestion	ἐὰν διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ, πῶς γνωσθήσεται τὸ αὐλούμενον ἢ τὸ κιθαριζόμενον?	1	how will it be known what is being played on the flute	Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this themselves. Alternate translation: “if they would not give different sounds, no one will know what tune the flute or harp is playing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
950	1CO	14	8	z6jg	figs-rquestion	ἐὰν ἄδηλον σάλπιγξ φωνὴν δῷ, τίς παρασκευάσεται εἰς πόλεμον?	1	who will prepare for battle?	Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this themselves. Alternate translation: “if a trumpet gives an uncertain sound, no one would know when it is time to prepare for battle.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
951	1CO	14	10	im7a	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδὲν ἄφωνον	1	none is without meaning	You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “they all have meaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
952	1CO	14	12	j1h7	figs-metaphor	πρὸς τὴν οἰκοδομὴν τῆς ἐκκλησίας, ζητεῖτε ἵνα περισσεύητε	1	try to excel in the gifts that build up the church	Paul speaks of the **church** as if it were a house that one could build and of the work of building the church as if it were something one could harvest. Alternate translation: “to succeed greatly in making God’s people more able to serve God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
953	1CO	14	13	j87g		διερμηνεύῃ	1	interpret	To **interpret** means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md).
954	1CO	14	14	kjh6	figs-metaphor	ὁ…νοῦς μου ἄκαρπός ἐστιν	1	my mind is unfruitful	The mind not understanding what is being prayed and, therefore, receiving no benefit from the prayer is spoken of as if the **mind is unfruitful**. Alternate translation: “I do not understand it in my mind” or “my mind does not benefit from the prayer, because I do not understand the words I am saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
955	1CO	14	15	vm6p	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐστιν?	1	What should I do?	Paul is introducing his conclusion. Alternate translation: “This is what I will do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
956	1CO	14	15	r11f		προσεύξομαι τῷ Πνεύματι, προσεύξομαι δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ. ψαλῶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ψαλῶ δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ	1	pray with my spirit … pray with my mind … sing with my spirit … sing with my mind	Prayers and songs must be in a language that the people present can understand.
957	1CO	14	15	fi2f		τῷ νοΐ	1	with my mind	“with words that I understand”
958	1CO	14	16	niu5	figs-you	εὐλογῇς…τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ…λέγεις	1	you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying	Though **you** and **your** are singular here, Paul is addressing everyone who prays only in the spirit, but not with the mind. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
959	1CO	14	16	r4w5	figs-rquestion	ἐὰν εὐλογῇς πνεύματι, ὁ ἀναπληρῶν τὸν τόπον τοῦ ἰδιώτου, πῶς ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν, ἐπὶ τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ, ἐπειδὴ τί λέγεις, οὐκ οἶδεν?	1	how will the outsider say “Amen” … saying?	This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “if you bless with the spirit, the outsider will never be able to say ‘Amen’ at your thanksgiving, since he does not know what you are saying.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
960	1CO	14	16	j3e3		τοῦ ἰδιώτου	1	the ungifted	This could refer to: (1) another person. (2) people who are new to their group.
961	1CO	14	16	ev63	figs-synecdoche	ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν	1	say “Amen”	“will … be able to agree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
962	1CO	14	17	a7wr	figs-you	σὺ μὲν…εὐχαριστεῖς	1	you certainly give	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word **you** here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
963	1CO	14	17	w25k	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἕτερος οὐκ οἰκοδομεῖται	1	the other person is not built up	Building people up represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated “builds up” in [1 Corinthians 8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “the other person is not strengthened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
964	1CO	14	17	m7cj	figs-activepassive	ἀλλ’ ὁ ἕτερος οὐκ οἰκοδομεῖται	1		You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what you say does not strengthen any outsider who might hear you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
965	1CO	14	19	cbw8	figs-hyperbole	ἢ μυρίους λόγους	1	than ten thousand words in a tongue	Paul was not counting **words**, but used exaggeration to emphasize that a few understandable words are far more valuable than even a great number of words in a language that people cannot understand. Alternate translation: “10,000 words” or “a great many words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
966	1CO	14	20	luu4			0	General Information:	Paul tells them that speaking in different languages was told ahead of time by the prophet Isaiah many years before this speaking in other languages happened at the start of Christ’s church.
967	1CO	14	20	mh5t	figs-metaphor	μὴ παιδία γίνεσθε ταῖς φρεσίν	1	do not be children in your thinking	Here, **children** is a metaphor for being spiritually immature. Alternate translation: “do not think like children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
968	1CO	14	21	jx6l	figs-activepassive	ἐν τῷ νόμῳ γέγραπται	1	In the law it is written,	You can state this in active form: Alternate translation: “The prophet wrote these words in the law:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
969	1CO	14	21	l9xz	figs-parallelism	ἐν ἑτερογλώσσοις καὶ ἐν χείλεσιν ἑτέρων	1	By men of strange tongues and by the lips of strangers	These two phrases mean basically the same thing and are used together for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
970	1CO	14	22	bp4j			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul gives specific instructions on an orderly way to use gifts in the church.
971	1CO	14	22	qj5f	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν, ἀλλὰ τοῖς ἀπίστοις	1	not for unbelievers, but for believers	This can be expressed positively and combined with the other positive statement. Alternate translation: “only for believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
972	1CO	14	23	hj3d	figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἐροῦσιν ὅτι μαίνεσθε?	1	would they not say that you are insane?	This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “they would say that you are insane.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
973	1CO	14	24	xxy5	figs-parallelism	ἐλέγχεται ὑπὸ πάντων, ἀνακρίνεται ὑπὸ πάντων	1	he would be convicted by all and examined by all	Paul says basically the same thing twice for emphasis. Alternate translation: “he would realize that he is guilty of sin because he hears what you are saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
974	1CO	14	25	ma47	figs-metonymy	τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς καρδίας αὐτοῦ φανερὰ γίνεται	1	The secrets of his heart would be revealed	Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s thoughts. Alternate translation: “his own private inner thoughts will be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
975	1CO	14	25	l62f	figs-activepassive	τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς καρδίας αὐτοῦ φανερὰ γίνεται	1		You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God would reveal to him the secrets of his heart” or “He would recognize his own private inner thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
976	1CO	14	25	w31w	figs-idiom	πεσὼν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον, προσκυνήσει τῷ Θεῷ	1	he would fall on his face and worship God	Here, **having fallen on his face** is an idiom, meaning he has bowed down. Alternate translation: “he would bow down and worship God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
977	1CO	14	26	bv9k	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐστιν, ἀδελφοί?	1	What is tp be then, brothers?	Paul uses a question to introduce the next part of his message. Alternate translation: “Because everything I have just told you is true, this is what you need to do, my fellow believers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
978	1CO	14	26	xzz2		ἑρμηνίαν	1	interpretation	Here, an **interpretation** means a telling of what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how “interpret” is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md).
979	1CO	14	27	wc1z		καὶ ἀνὰ μέρος	1	and each one in turn	“and they should speak one after another” or “and they should speak one at a time”
980	1CO	14	27	ari2		διερμηνευέτω	1	must interpret	To **interpret** means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how “interpret” is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md).
981	1CO	14	29	a9iz		προφῆται…δύο ἢ τρεῖς λαλείτωσαν	1	Let two or three prophets speak	This could mean: (1) only two or three prophets should speak at any one meeting. (2) only two or three prophets should take turns speaking at any one time.
982	1CO	14	30	sl1q	figs-activepassive	ἐὰν…ἄλλῳ ἀποκαλυφθῇ	1	if a revelation is given to another	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “if God gives insight to another person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
983	1CO	14	31	xr69		καθ’ ἕνα…προφητεύειν	1	prophesy one by one	Only one person should prophesy at a time.
984	1CO	14	31	nrq1	figs-activepassive	πάντες…παρακαλῶνται	3	all may be encouraged	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you may encourage all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
985	1CO	14	33	my65		οὐ…ἐστιν ἀκαταστασίας ὁ Θεὸς	1	God is not a God of confusion	God does not create confusing situations by making people all speak at the same time.
986	1CO	14	34	gjv2		αἱ γυναῖκες…σιγάτωσαν	1	let be silent	This could mean: (1) they should stop speaking. (2) they should stop speaking when someone is prophesying. (3) they should be absolutely silent during the church service.
987	1CO	14	36	h8lp	figs-rquestion	ἢ ἀφ’ ὑμῶν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐξῆλθεν, ἢ εἰς ὑμᾶς μόνους κατήντησεν?	1	Did the word of God come from you? Are you the only ones it has reached?	Paul uses these questions to emphasize that the Corinthians are not the only ones who understand what God wants Christians to do. Alternate translation: “The word of God did not come from you in Corinth; you are not the only people who understand God’s will.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
988	1CO	14	36	mj6b	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the word of God	Here, the **word of God** is a metonym for the message from God. Alternate translation: “God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
989	1CO	14	37	ab6u		ἐπιγινωσκέτω	1	he should acknowledge	A true prophet or truly spiritual person will accept Paul’s writings as coming from the Lord.
990	1CO	14	39	jvr7		τὸ λαλεῖν μὴ κωλύετε γλώσσαις	1	do not forbid anyone from speaking in tongues	Paul makes it clear that speaking in tongues at a church gathering is permissible and acceptable.
991	1CO	14	40	d7ia	figs-activepassive	πάντα δὲ εὐσχημόνως καὶ κατὰ τάξιν γινέσθω	1	But let all things be done properly and in order	Paul is stressing that church gatherings should be held in an orderly manner. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But do all things properly and in order” or “But do everything in an orderly, appropriate way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
992	1CO	15	intro	abci			0		# 1 Corinthians 15 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>### Resurrection<br><br>This chapter includes a very important teaching about the resurrection of Jesus. The Greek people did not believe that a person could live after they died. Paul defends the resurrection of Jesus. He teaches why it is important to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Resurrection<br><br>Paul presents the resurrection as the ultimate proof that Jesus is God. Christ is the first of many who God will raise to life. The resurrection is central to the gospel. Few doctrines are as important as this one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>Paul uses many different figures of speech in this chapter. He uses them to express difficult theological teachings in a way that people can understand.
993	1CO	15	1	gc6n			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul reminds them that it is the gospel that saves them and he tells them again what the gospel is. Then he gives them a short history lesson, which ends with what will yet happen.
994	1CO	15	1	la9v		γνωρίζω…ὑμῖν	1	make known to you	“I am helping you remember”
995	1CO	15	1	xv53	figs-metaphor	ἐν ᾧ καὶ ἑστήκατε	1	on which you stand	Paul is speaking of the Corinthians as if they were a house and the gospel as if it were the foundation on which the house was standing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
996	1CO	15	2	xh29	figs-activepassive	σῴζεσθε	1	you are being saved	You can state this in active form. “God is saving you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
997	1CO	15	2	le2k		τίνι λόγῳ εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν	1	the word I preached to you	“to the message I preached to you”
998	1CO	15	3	sp4p		ἐν πρώτοις	1	as of first importance	This could mean: (1) this is the most important of many things. (2) this is the first in time (3) this was done previously.
999	1CO	15	3	azw6		ὑπὲρ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν	1	for our sins	“to pay for our sins” or “so that God could forgive our sins”
1000	1CO	15	3	inj2		κατὰ τὰς Γραφάς	1	according to the scriptures	Here, **the Scriptures** refers to the writings of the Old Testament.
1001	1CO	15	4	wa7m	figs-activepassive	ἐτάφη	1	he was buried	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they buried him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1002	1CO	15	4	n7c7	figs-activepassive	ἐγήγερται	1	he was raised	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God raised him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1003	1CO	15	4	d6ew		ἐγήγερται	1	was raised	“was caused to live again”
1004	1CO	15	5	rhd3			0	Connecting Statement:	If you need for verse 5 to be a complete sentence, end [1 Corinthians 15:4](../15/04.md) with a comma so that verse 5 completes the sentence begun in [1 Corinthians 15:3](../15/03.md).
1005	1CO	15	5	q3nb		ὤφθη Κηφᾷ	1	he appeared	“showed himself to Cephas”
1006	1CO	15	6	q8bl	figs-euphemism	τινὲς…ἐκοιμήθησαν	1	some have fallen asleep	Here, **have fallen asleep** is a euphemism for death. Alternate translation: “some have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1007	1CO	15	8	n9c6		ἔσχατον…πάντων	1	Last of all	“finally, after he had appeared to the others”
1008	1CO	15	8	vg7t	figs-idiom	τῷ ἐκτρώματι	1	a child born at the wrong time	This is an idiom by which Paul may mean that he became a Christian much later than the other apostles. Or perhaps he means that, unlike the other apostles, he did not witness Jesus’ three-year-long ministry. Alternate translation: “someone who missed the experiences of the others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1009	1CO	15	10	xiq6		χάριτι…Θεοῦ, εἰμι ὅ εἰμι	1	by the grace of God I am what I am	God’s grace or kindness has made Paul as he is now.
1010	1CO	15	10	n45h	figs-litotes	ἡ χάρις αὐτοῦ ἡ εἰς ἐμὲ, οὐ κενὴ ἐγενήθη	1	his grace in me was not in vain	Paul is emphasizing through litotes that God worked through Paul. Alternate translation: “because he was kind to me, I was able to do much good work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1011	1CO	15	10	xh95	figs-metaphor	ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ σὺν ἐμοί	1	the grace of God that is with me	Paul speaks of the work he was able to do because **God** was kind to him as if that **grace** were actually doing the work. Alternate translation: This could mean: (1) this is literally true, and God actually did the work and kindly used Paul as a tool. (2) Paul is using a metaphor and saying that God was kind to let Paul do the work and to make Paul’s work have good results. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1012	1CO	15	12	ub2p	figs-rquestion	πῶς λέγουσιν ἐν ὑμῖν τινες, ὅτι ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν?	1	how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead?	Paul is using this question to begin a new topic. Alternate translation: “you should not be saying that there is no resurrection of the dead!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1013	1CO	15	12	jbi8		ἐγήγερται	1	raised	he was made alive again
1014	1CO	15	13	cn2m	figs-hypo	εἰ…ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν, οὐδὲ Χριστὸς ἐγήγερται	1	if there is no resurrection of the dead, then not even Christ has been raised	Paul is using a hypothetical case to argue that there is a **resurrection of the dead**. He knows that **Christ has been raised** and so infers that there is a resurrection. To say that there is no resurrection is to say that Christ has not been raised, but this is false because Paul has seen the resurrected Christ ([1 Corinthians 15:8](../15/08.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
1015	1CO	15	13	mi12	figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ Χριστὸς ἐγήγερται	1	not even Christ has been raised	You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has not even raised Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1016	1CO	15	15	gi99			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul wants them assured that Christ rose from the dead.
1017	1CO	15	15	ctn5		εὑρισκόμεθα…ψευδομάρτυρες τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	we are found to be false witnesses about God	Paul is arguing that if Christ did not rise from the dead, then they are bearing false witness or lying about Christ’s coming alive again.
1018	1CO	15	15	aq5s	figs-activepassive	εὑρισκόμεθα	1	we are found to be	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone will realize that we are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1019	1CO	15	17	v6vz		ματαία ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν, ἔτι ἐστὲ ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν	1	your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins	Their faith is based on Christ having risen from the dead, so if that did not happen, their faith will do them no good.
1020	1CO	15	19	d9nq		πάντων ἀνθρώπων	1	of all people	“of everyone, including believers and non-believers”
1021	1CO	15	19	ts7u		ἐλεεινότεροι πάντων ἀνθρώπων ἐσμέν	1	of all people we are most to be pitied	“people should feel sorry for us more than they do for anyone else”
1022	1CO	15	20	cxp9		νυνὶ…Χριστὸς	1	now Christ	“as it is, Christ” or “this is the truth: Christ”
1023	1CO	15	20	zw31	figs-metaphor	ἀπαρχὴ	1	the firstfruits	Here, **firstfruit** is a metaphor, comparing Christ to the first of the harvest, which would be followed by the rest of the harvest. Christ was the first to be raised from the dead. Alternate translation: “who is like the first part of the harvest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1024	1CO	15	20	n6cl	figs-idiom	Χριστὸς ἐγήγερται ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Christ has been raised from the dead, the firstfruit of those who have fallen asleep	Here, **has been raised** is an idiom for “caused to live again.” Alternate translation: “Christ has been caused to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1025	1CO	15	20	a385	figs-activepassive	Χριστὸς ἐγήγερται ἐκ νεκρῶν	1		You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has raised Christ from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1026	1CO	15	21	uca8	figs-abstractnouns	δι’ ἀνθρώπου θάνατος	1	death came by a man	The abstract noun **death** can be expressed with the verb “die.” Alternate translation. “people die because of what one man did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1027	1CO	15	21	gf8p	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ δι’ ἀνθρώπου ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν	1	by a man also came the resurrection of the dead	The abstract noun **resurrection** can be expressed with the verb “raise.” Alternate translation: “people are raised from the dead because of another man” or “people will become alive again because of what one man did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1028	1CO	15	23	p4g9	figs-metaphor	ἀπαρχὴ	1	the firstfruits	Here, **firstfruit** is a metaphor, comparing Christ to the first of the harvest, which would be followed by the rest of the harvest. Christ was the first to be raised from the dead. Alternate translation: “who is like the first part of the harvest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1029	1CO	15	24	u298			0	General Information:	Here the words **he** and **his** refer to Christ.
1030	1CO	15	24	uwh3		καταργήσῃ πᾶσαν ἀρχὴν, καὶ πᾶσαν ἐξουσίαν, καὶ δύναμιν	1	he will abolish all rule and all authority and power	“he will stop those people who rule, who have authority, and who have power from doing what they are doing”
1031	1CO	15	25	t8mk	figs-idiom	ἄχρι οὗ θῇ πάντας τοὺς ἐχθροὺς ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ	1	until he has put all his enemies under his feet	Kings who won wars would put their **feet** on the necks of those whom they had defeated. Alternate translation: “until God has completely destroyed all of Christ’s enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1032	1CO	15	26	x49h	figs-personification	ἔσχατος ἐχθρὸς καταργεῖται ὁ θάνατος	1	The last enemy to be destroyed is death	Paul speaks of **death** here as if it were a person whom God will kill. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1033	1CO	15	26	n32f	figs-activepassive	ἔσχατος ἐχθρὸς καταργεῖται ὁ θάνατος	1		You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The final enemy that God will destroy is death itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1034	1CO	15	27	df59	figs-idiom	πάντα…ὑπέταξεν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ	1	he has put everything under his feet	Kings who won wars would put their **feet** on the necks of those whom they had defeated. See how “put … under his feet” is translated in [1 Corinthians 15:25](../15/25.md). Alternate translation: “God has completely destroyed all of Christ’s enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1035	1CO	15	28	xm8u	figs-activepassive	ὑποταγῇ αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα	1	all things are subjected to him	This can stated as active. Alternate translation: “God has made all things subject to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1036	1CO	15	28	a1cd	figs-activepassive	αὐτὸς ὁ Υἱὸς, ὑποταγήσεται	1	the Son himself will be subjected	This can stated as active. Alternate translation: “the Son himself will become subject” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1037	1CO	15	28	ksj4		αὐτὸς ὁ Υἱὸς	1	the Son himself	In the previous verses he was referred to as “Christ.” Alternate translation: “Christ, that is, the Son himself”
1038	1CO	15	28	im2j	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς	1	the Son	This is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1039	1CO	15	29	a4d4	figs-rquestion	ἐπεὶ τί ποιήσουσιν, οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι ὑπὲρ τῶν νεκρῶν?	1	Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead?	Paul uses this question to teach the Corinthians. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Otherwise it would be useless for Christians to receive baptism for the dead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1040	1CO	15	29	lw86	figs-hypo	εἰ ὅλως νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται, τί καὶ βαπτίζονται ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν?	1	If the dead are not raised at all, why are they baptized for them?	Paul uses a hypothetical situation to argue that the dead are raised. To say that **the dead are not raised** is to say that people should not be baptized for the dead. But some people, probably some members of the church in Corinth, are baptized for the dead, so he infers those people are baptized for the dead because they believe that the dead are raised. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
1041	1CO	15	29	jdc9	figs-activepassive	νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται	1	the dead are not raised	You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “God does not raise the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1042	1CO	15	29	t3yc		οὐκ ἐγείρονται	1	are not raised	“are not caused to live again”
1043	1CO	15	29	s7kx	figs-rquestion	τί καὶ βαπτίζονται ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν	1	why then are they baptized for them?	Paul uses this question to teach the Corinthians. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “there would be no reason for them to have people baptize them on behalf of dead people.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1044	1CO	15	30	h4ra	figs-rquestion	τί καὶ ἡμεῖς κινδυνεύομεν πᾶσαν ὥραν?	1	Why then, are we in danger every hour?	Paul uses this question to teach the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “We gain nothing by being in danger every hour.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1045	1CO	15	30	t593	figs-explicit	τί καὶ ἡμεῖς κινδυνεύομεν πᾶσαν ὥραν?	1		The reason he and others were in danger is that some people were angry that they taught that Jesus will raise people from death. Alternate translation: “If people will not rise from the dead, we gain nothing by being in danger every hour for teaching that people will rise.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1046	1CO	15	31	i7d7	figs-hyperbole	καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀποθνῄσκω	1	I die every day!	This exaggeration means he was in danger of dying. He knew that some people wanted to kill him because they did not like what he was teaching. Alternate translation: “Every day I am in danger of dying” or “Every day I risk my life!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1047	1CO	15	31	d51t		καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀποθνῄσκω, νὴ τὴν ὑμετέραν καύχησιν	1	I swear by my boasting in you	Paul uses this statement as evidence that he faces death every day. Alternate translation: “You can know I die every day, because you know about my boasting in you”
1048	1CO	15	31	znl3	figs-explicit	τὴν ὑμετέραν καύχησιν, ἀδελφοί, ἣν ἔχω ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, τῷ Κυρίῳ ἡμῶν	1	my boasting in you, brothers, which I have in Christ Jesus our Lord	Paul boasted in them because of what Christ Jesus had done for him. Alternate translation: “my boasting in you, which I do because of my relationship with Christ Jesus our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1049	1CO	15	31	p3ym		τὴν ὑμετέραν καύχησιν	1	my boasting in you	“telling other people how good you are”
1050	1CO	15	32	q6mb	figs-rquestion	εἰ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, ἐθηριομάχησα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ, τί μοι τὸ ὄφελος?	1	What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised	Paul wants the Corinthians to understand without him having to tell them. This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “If Christ was not raised, I gained nothing, according to the opinion of most people, by fighting with beasts at Ephesus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1051	1CO	15	32	lm3v	figs-metaphor	ἐθηριομάχησα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ	1	I fought with beasts at Ephesus	This could mean: (1) Paul was speaking figuratively about his arguments with learned pagans or other conflicts with people who wanted to kill him. (2) Paul was actually put into the arena to fight against dangerous animals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1052	1CO	15	32	c36a		φάγωμεν καὶ πίωμεν, αὔριον γὰρ ἀποθνῄσκομεν	1	Let us eat and drink, for tomorrow we die	Paul concludes that if there is no further life after death, it is better for us to enjoy this life as we can, for tomorrow our life will end without any further hope.
1053	1CO	15	33	q7uc		φθείρουσιν ἤθη χρηστὰ ὁμιλίαι κακαί	1	Bad company corrupts good morals	If you live with bad people, you will act like them. Paul is quoting a common saying.
1054	1CO	15	34	gr3v		ἐκνήψατε	1	Sober up	“You must think seriously about this”
1055	1CO	15	35	w4hk			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul gives some specifics about how the resurrection of the believers’ bodies will take place. He gives a picture of natural and spiritual bodies and compares the first man Adam with the last Adam, Christ.
1056	1CO	15	35	hw4a	figs-rquestion	ἀλλ’ ἐρεῖ τις, πῶς ἐγείρονται οἱ νεκροί? ποίῳ δὲ σώματι ἔρχονται?	1	But someone will say, “How are the dead raised, and with what kind of body will they come?”	This could mean: (1) the person is asking sincerely. (2) the person is using the question to mock the idea of a resurrection. Alternate translation: “But some will say that they cannot imagine how God will raise the dead, and what kind of body God would give them in the resurrection.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1057	1CO	15	35	ty4t		ἐρεῖ τις	1	someone will say	“perhaps someone will ask”
1058	1CO	15	35	e5lv		ποίῳ…σώματι ἔρχονται	1	with what kind of body will they come	That is, will it be a physical body or a spiritual body? What shape will the body have? What will the body be made of? Translate using the most general question that someone who wants to know the answers to these questions would ask.
1059	1CO	15	36	ha84	figs-you	ἄφρων! σὺ ὃ σπείρεις	1	You are so foolish! What you sow	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of **you** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1060	1CO	15	36	jnf9		ἄφρων! σὺ	1	You are so foolish! What you sow	“You do not know about this at all!”
1061	1CO	15	36	q2zd	figs-metaphor	ὃ σπείρεις, οὐ ζῳοποιεῖται, ἐὰν μὴ ἀποθάνῃ	1	What you sow will not start to grow unless it dies	A seed will not grow unless it is first buried underground. In the same way, a person has to die before God can resurrect him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1062	1CO	15	37	pw6v	figs-metaphor	ὃ σπείρεις, οὐ τὸ σῶμα τὸ γενησόμενον	1	What you sow is not the body that will be	Paul uses the metaphor of the seed again to say that God will resurrect the dead body of the believer, but that body will not appear as it was. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1063	1CO	15	37	h6zi	figs-you	ὃ σπείρεις	1	What you sow	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word **you** here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1064	1CO	15	38	dmx1		ὁ…Θεὸς δίδωσιν αὐτῷ σῶμα, καθὼς ἠθέλησεν	1	God will give it a body as he chooses	“God will decide what kind of body it will have”
1065	1CO	15	39	qi8y		σὰρξ	1	flesh	In the context of animals, **flesh** may be translated as “body,” “skin,” or “meat.”
1066	1CO	15	40	d9k2		σώματα ἐπουράνια	1	heavenly bodies	This could refer to: (1) the sun, moon, stars, and other visible lights in the sky. (2) heavenly beings, such as angels and other supernatural beings.
1067	1CO	15	40	k9pg		σώματα ἐπίγεια	1	earthly bodies	This refers to humans.
1068	1CO	15	40	qg3p		ἑτέρα μὲν ἡ τῶν ἐπουρανίων δόξα, ἑτέρα δὲ ἡ τῶν ἐπιγείων	1	the glory of the heavenly body is one kind and the glory of the earthly is another	“the glory that heavenly bodies have is different from the glory of human bodies”
1069	1CO	15	40	j1kb		δόξα	1	glory	Here, **glory** refers to the relative brightness to the human eye of objects in the sky.
1070	1CO	15	42	s12t	figs-metaphor	σπείρεται…ἐγείρεται	1	What is sown … what is raised	The writer speaks of a person’s body being buried as if it were a seed that is scattered on the ground. And he speaks of a person’s body being raised from the dead as if it were a plant growing from the seed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1071	1CO	15	42	b6ob	figs-activepassive	σπείρεται…ἐγείρεται	1		You can state the passive verbs in active form. Alternate translation: “What goes into the ground … what comes out of the ground” or “What people bury … what God raises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1072	1CO	15	42	ay76		ἐγείρεται	1	is raised	“is caused to live again”
1073	1CO	15	42	rw3k		ἐν φθορᾷ, ἐγείρεται ἐν ἀφθαρσίᾳ	1	in decay … in immortality	“that can rot, cannot rot when it is raised”
1074	1CO	15	43	h4u5	figs-metaphor	σπείρεται…ἐγείρεται	1	It is sown … it is raised	The writer speaks of a person’s body being buried as if it were a seed that is scattered on the ground. And he speaks of a person’s body being raised from the dead as if it were a plant growing from the seed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1075	1CO	15	43	zo03	figs-activepassive	σπείρεται…ἐγείρεται	1		You can state the passive verbs in active form. Alternate translation: “It goes into the ground … it comes out of the ground” or “People bury it … God raises it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1076	1CO	15	44	u856	figs-metaphor	σπείρεται…ἐγείρεται	1	It is sown … it is raised	The writer speaks of a person’s body being buried as if it were a seed that is planted in the ground. And he speaks of a person’s body being raised from the dead as if it were a plant growing from the seed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1077	1CO	15	44	b4dm	figs-activepassive	σπείρεται…ἐγείρεται	1		You can state the passive verbs in active form. Alternate translation: “It goes into the ground … it comes out of the ground” or “People bury it … God raises it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1078	1CO	15	46	fc51		ἀλλ’ οὐ πρῶτον τὸ πνευματικὸν, ἀλλὰ τὸ ψυχικόν, ἔπειτα τὸ πνευματικόν	1	But the spiritual did not come first but the natural, and then the spiritual	“The natural being came first. The spiritual being is from God and came later.”
1079	1CO	15	46	nd64		ψυχικόν	1	natural	created by earthly processes, not yet connected to God
1080	1CO	15	47	m2pj	figs-explicit	ὁ πρῶτος ἄνθρωπος ἐκ γῆς, χοϊκός	1	The first man is of the earth, made of dust	God made the **first man**, Adam, from the **dust** of the **earth**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1081	1CO	15	48	r9be	figs-explicit	ὁ ἐπουράνιος	1	ὁ ἐπουράνιος	This refers to Jesus Christ, who is from heaven. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1082	1CO	15	48	s9pn		οἱ ἐπουράνιοι	1	those who are of heaven	“those who belong to God”
1083	1CO	15	49	mq8z		εἰκόνα τοῦ χοϊκοῦ, φορέσωμεν καὶ τὴν εἰκόνα τοῦ ἐπουρανίου	1	have borne the image … will also bear the image	“have been just like Adam, we will also be just like Jesus”
1084	1CO	15	50	jub2			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul wants them to realize that some believers will not die physically but will still get a resurrected body through Christ’s victory.
1085	1CO	15	50	mwy3	figs-parallelism	σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα Βασιλείαν Θεοῦ κληρονομῆσαι οὐ δύναται, οὐδὲ ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν κληρονομεῖ	1	flesh and blood cannot inherit the kingdom of God. Neither does what is perishable inherit what is imperishable	This could mean: (1) the two sentences mean the same thing. Alternate translation: “human beings who will surely die cannot inherit the permanent kingdom of God” (2) the second sentence finishes the thought begun by the first. Alternate translation: “weak human beings cannot inherit the kingdom of God. Neither do those who will certainly die inherit a kingdom that will last forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1086	1CO	15	50	nz7s	figs-metonymy	σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα	1	flesh and blood	Here, **flesh and blood** refers to people, who inhabit a physical body. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1087	1CO	15	50	e4gd	figs-metaphor	κληρονομῆσαι	1	inherit	Receiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1088	1CO	15	50	b9hc		ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν	1	the perishable … the imperishable	“what can rot … what cannot rot.” See how these words are translated in [1 Corinthians 15:42](../15/42.md).
1089	1CO	15	51	k5dw	figs-activepassive	πάντες…ἀλλαγησόμεθα	2	we will all be changed	You can state this as active. Alternate translation: “God will change us all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1090	1CO	15	52	p8f8	figs-activepassive	ἀλλαγησόμεθα	1	We will be changed	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will change us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1091	1CO	15	52	r4ix		ἐν ῥιπῇ ὀφθαλμοῦ	1	in the twinkling of an eye	It will happen as fast as it takes for a person to blink his or her eye.
1092	1CO	15	52	h668	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ σάλπιγγι	1	at the last trumpet	Here, the **last trumpet** refers to the sounding of trumpets before the return of Christ and the final judgment of those who have not believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “when the last trumpet sounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1093	1CO	15	52	l66q	figs-activepassive	οἱ νεκροὶ ἐγερθήσονται	1	the dead will be raised	You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will raise the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1094	1CO	15	52	ymk9		ἐγερθήσονται	1	raised	“will be caused to live again”
1095	1CO	15	52	bmx2		ἄφθαρτοι	1	imperishable	“in a form that cannot rot.” See how a similar phrase is translated in [1 Corinthians 15:42](../15/42.md).
1096	1CO	15	53	nua2		τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο…ἀφθαρσίαν	1	this perishable body … is imperishable	“this body that can rot … the inability to rot.” See how similar phrases are translated in [1 Corinthians 15:42](../15/42.md).
1097	1CO	15	53	iyd2	figs-metaphor	ἐνδύσασθαι ἀφθαρσίαν	1	must put on	Paul is speaking of God making our bodies so they will never die again as if God were putting new clothes on us. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1098	1CO	15	54	qq5m	figs-personification	τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο ἐνδύσηται ἀφθαρσίαν, καὶ τὸ θνητὸν τοῦτο ἐνδύσηται ἀθανασίαν	1	when this perishable body has put on what is imperishable	Here the body is spoken of as if it were a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1099	1CO	15	54	od10	figs-metaphor	τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο ἐνδύσηται ἀφθαρσίαν	1		Here becoming **imperishable** is spoken of as if being imperishable was clothing that a body would wear. Alternate translation: “when this perishable body has become imperishable” or “when this body that can rot can no longer rot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1100	1CO	15	54	j9zs	figs-metaphor	τὸ θνητὸν τοῦτο ἐνδύσηται ἀθανασίαν	1	this mortal body has put on immortality	Here becoming immortal is spoken of as if being immortal was clothing that a body would wear. Alternate translation: “when this mortal body has become immortal” or “when this body that can die can no longer die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1101	1CO	15	55	c9zw	figs-apostrophe	θάνατε	1	Death, where is your victory? Death, where is your sting?	Paul speaks as if death were a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
1102	1CO	15	55	pdxo	figs-rquestion	ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον?	1		Paul uses this question to mock the power of death, which Christ has defeated. Alternate translation: “Death has no victory. Death has no sting.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1103	1CO	15	55	gg3d	figs-you	σου…σου	1	your … your	Both possessive pronouns **your** are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1104	1CO	15	56	iyd3		τὸ…κέντρον τοῦ θανάτου ἡ ἁμαρτία	1	the sting of death is sin	It is through **sin** that we are destined to face **death**, that is, to die.
1105	1CO	15	56	pf4e		ἡ…δύναμις τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ νόμος	2	the power of sin is the law	God’s law that was passed down by Moses defines sin and shows us how we sin before God.
1106	1CO	15	57	ztj6		τῷ διδόντι ἡμῖν τὸ νῖκος	1	gives us the victory	“who has defeated death for us”
1107	1CO	15	58	k4c4			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul wants believers, while they work for the Lord, to remember the changed, resurrected bodies that God is going to give them.
1108	1CO	15	58	j1pl	figs-metaphor	ἑδραῖοι γίνεσθε, ἀμετακίνητοι	1	be steadfast and immovable	Paul speaks of someone who lets nothing stop him from carrying out his decisions as if he could not be physically moved. Alternate translation: “be determined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1109	1CO	15	58	zn8f	figs-metaphor	περισσεύοντες ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ τοῦ Κυρίου πάντοτε	1	Always abound in the work of the Lord	Paul speaks of efforts made in working for the Lord as if they were objects that a person could acquire more of. Alternate translation: “Always work for the Lord faithfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1110	1CO	16	intro	abcj			0		# 1 Corinthians 16 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul briefly covers many topics in this chapter. It was common in the ancient Near East for the last part of letters to have personal greetings.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Preparation for his coming<br><br>Paul gave practical instructions to help prepare the Corinthian church for his visit. He told them to start collecting money every Sunday for the believers in Jerusalem. He hoped to come and spend the winter with them. He told them to help Timothy when he came. He had hoped Apollos would go to them, but Apollos did not think it was the right time. Paul also told them to obey Stephanus. Finally, he sent his greetings to everyone.
1111	1CO	16	1	zh6u			0	Connecting Statement:	In his closing notes, Paul reminds the Corinthian believers to collect money for the needy believers in Jerusalem. He reminds them that Timothy will come to them before he goes to Paul.
1112	1CO	16	1	yer5		εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους	1	for the saints	Paul was collecting money from his churches for the poor Jewish Christians in Jerusalem and Judea.
1113	1CO	16	1	kh6h		ὥσπερ διέταξα	1	as I directed	“as I gave specific instructions to”
1114	1CO	16	2	h8n9		θησαυρίζων	1	storing up	This could mean: (1) “keep it at home.” (2) “leave it with the church.”
1115	1CO	16	2	wc3w		ἵνα μὴ ὅταν ἔλθω, τότε λογεῖαι γίνωνται	1	so that there will be no collections when I come	“so that you will not have to collect more money while I am with you”
1116	1CO	16	3	yj6c		οὓς ἐὰν δοκιμάσητε	1	whomever you approve	Paul is telling the church to choose some of their own people to take their offering to Jerusalem. “whomever you choose” or “the people you appoint”
1117	1CO	16	3	j612		δι’ ἐπιστολῶν…πέμψω	1	I will send with letters	This could mean: (1) Paul will send with letters that he will write. (2) Paul will send with letters that they will write.
1118	1CO	16	6	w94k		ὑμεῖς με προπέμψητε, οὗ ἐὰν πορεύωμαι	1	you may help me on my way, wherever I go	This means the Corinthians might give Paul money or other things he needs so that he and his ministry team could continue to travel.
1119	1CO	16	7	xr88	figs-litotes	οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἄρτι ἐν παρόδῳ ἰδεῖν	1	I do not wish to see you now	Paul is stating that he wants to visit for a long time later, not just for a short time soon. You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “I want to spend a longer time with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1120	1CO	16	8	qkw9		τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	Pentecost	Paul would stay in Ephesus until the festival of **Pentecost**, which came in May or June, 50 days after Passover. He would then travel through Macedonia, and later try to arrive in Corinth before winter started in November.
1121	1CO	16	9	fyj3	figs-metaphor	θύρα…ἀνέῳγεν μεγάλη καὶ ἐνεργής	1	a wide door has opened	Paul speaks of the opportunity God has given him to win people to the gospel as if it were a **door** that God had opened so he could walk through it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1122	1CO	16	10	p6vb		βλέπετε ἵνα ἀφόβως γένηται πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	see that he is with you unafraid	“see that he has no cause to fear being with you”
1123	1CO	16	11	f4mw		μή τις…αὐτὸν ἐξουθενήσῃ	1	Let no one despise him	Because Timothy was much younger than Paul, sometimes he was not shown the respect he deserved as a minister of the gospel.
1124	1CO	16	12	is6j	figs-exclusive	Ἀπολλῶ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ	1	our brother Apollos	Some languages such as English require the word **our** for clarity. If added, **you** would refer to Paul and his readers, so it is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1125	1CO	16	13	p2la	figs-parallelism	γρηγορεῖτε, στήκετε ἐν τῇ πίστει, ἀνδρίζεσθε, κραταιοῦσθε	1	Stay alert; stand firm in the faith; act like men; be strong	Paul is describing what he wants the Corinthians to do as if he was giving four commands to soldiers in war. These four commands mean almost the same thing and are used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1126	1CO	16	13	ng8n	figs-metaphor	γρηγορεῖτε	1	Stay alert	Paul speaks of people being aware of what is happening as if they were guards keeping watch over a city or vineyard. You can state this more clearly. Alternate translation: “Be careful whom you trust” or “Watch out for danger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1127	1CO	16	13	uys8	figs-metaphor	στήκετε ἐν τῇ πίστει	1	stand firm in the faith	Paul speaks of people continuing to believe in Christ according to his teaching as if they were soldiers refusing to retreat when the enemy attacks. This could mean: (1) they should keep strongly believing what Paul and his companions have taught them. (2) they should keep strongly trusting in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1128	1CO	16	13	a3fs	figs-metaphor	ἀνδρίζεσθε	1	act like men	In the society in which Paul and his audience lived, men usually provided for families by doing the heavy work and fighting against invaders. You can state this more clearly. Alternate translation: “be responsible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1129	1CO	16	14	rij5		πάντα ὑμῶν ἐν ἀγάπῃ γινέσθω	1	Let all that you do be done in love	“Everything you do, you should do because you love people” or “Everything you do, you should do because you love God”
1130	1CO	16	15	fy4e			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul begins to close his letter and sends greetings from other churches, as well as from Prisca, Aquila, and Paul himself.
1131	1CO	16	15	asp2	translate-names	τὴν οἰκίαν Στεφανᾶ	1	the household of Stephanas	**Stephanas** was one of the first believers in the church at Corinth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1132	1CO	16	15	na2p	translate-names	Ἀχαΐας	1	Achaia	**Achaia** is the name of a province in Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1133	1CO	16	17	iju8		Στεφανᾶ, καὶ Φορτουνάτου, καὶ Ἀχαϊκοῦ	1	Stephanas, and Fortunatus, and Achaicus	**Stephanas and Fortunatus** were either some of the first Corinthian believers or church elders who were co-workers with Paul.
1134	1CO	16	17	e79z	translate-names	Στεφανᾶ, καὶ Φορτουνάτου, καὶ Ἀχαϊκοῦ	1	Stephanas, and Fortunatus, and Achaicus	**Stephanas and Fortunatus** are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1135	1CO	16	17	an3e		τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα οὗτοι ἀνεπλήρωσαν	1	They have made up for your absence	“they made up for the fact that you were not here”
1136	1CO	16	18	f3kg		ἀνέπαυσαν γὰρ τὸ ἐμὸν πνεῦμα	1	For they have refreshed my spirit	Paul is saying he was encouraged by their visit.
1137	1CO	16	21	izu6		ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ, Παύλου	1	I, Paul, write this with my own hand	Paul was making it clear that the instructions in this letter are from him, even though one of his co-laborers wrote what Paul was saying in the rest of the letter. Paul wrote this last part with his **own hand**.
1138	1CO	16	22	c1kx		ἤτω ἀνάθεμα	1	may he be accursed	“may God curse him.” See how **accursed** was translated in [1 Corinthians 12:3](../12/03.md).